KR101106398B1 - Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters from keypad - Google Patents

Abstract

It has realized the most concise layout of keyboards, ambiguity, and "minimum" input strokes among Korean keypad Korean input systems.

In addition, a combination of long press of a specific button and repeated pressing of a specific button, and combination of long pressing of a specific button and repeated pressing of a control button have been proposed.

Keypad; Alphabet input;

Description

Alphabet input device in keypad and method thereof {APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INPUTTING ALPHABET CHARACTERS FROM KEYPAD}             

Figure 1-1. Example of configuring standard keypad using English standard keypad

Figure 1-2. When assigning approximately three alphabets to each button, the alphabet in the center is designated as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are composed of subsequent alphabets with the subsequent keypad.

Figure 1-3. An example of configuring the standard keypad when assigning three to four alphabets to each button

Figure 2-1. Example of configuring a subsequent Japanese keypad (1)

Figure 2-2. Example of configuring the subsequent keypad in Japanese (2)

Figure 2-3. Graph of 2D Recycling Control Processing Method

Figure 2-4. Graph of two-dimensional cross control processing method

Figure 3-1. Example of configuring subsequent keypad (in Arabic)

Figure 3-2. Example of configuring a subsequent keypad (in Arabic, using two control buttons)

Figure 3-3. When assigning approximately three alphabets to each button, the alphabet in the center is designated as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are composed of subsequent alphabets with the subsequent keypad.

Figure 4-1. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button 1 (English)

Figure 4-2. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button in pairs 2 (English)                 

Figure 4-3. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button 3 (English)

Figure 4-4. Flowchart for inputting the basic consonant and the basic vowel by repeated selection method (Korean example)

Figure 4-5. Example of applying 3 collection elements

Figure 4-6. Example of solving Figure 1 from the perspective of applying the repeated selection method using four vowel elements

Figures 4-7. Example of assigning four collection elements to four buttons

Figures 4-8. Example of solving the expression of Figure 3 from the perspective of applying the iterative selection method

Figures 4-9. Modified display example of Figure 1

Figure 4-10. Example using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ"

Figures 4-11. 6 modified display example

Figures 4-12. Examples using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ"

Figure 4-13. 8 modified display example

Figure 10. Example of generating words on the client (terminal) side

Figure 11. Server-side word generation for client-side input

Figures 4-14. Examples of combining vowels using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ" and "ㅣ" (graph)

Figures 4-15. Flowchart of Keypad Korean Input Processing

Figures 4-16. Flowchart of Korean Input Processing on a 2-Ball Keyboard

Figure 5-1. Input of Chinese characters using Pinyin Dictionary and Pinyin                 

Figure 5-2. English Text Input Example Using Totally Associative Simple Code

Figure 5-3. Case of processing input value as promised simple code in parallel input method (1)

Figure 5-4. Case of processing input value as promised simple code in parallel input method (2)

Figure 5-5. Application example of parallel input method through client and server

Figure 5-6. Grouping of phrases (words or phrases) stored in the index

Figure 6-1. A case where a server (intermediate server) interprets a simple code received from a client and transmits the information obtained by interpreting the simple code to a third server that needs the information.

Figure 7-1. An example of the subsequent keypad that can input various symbols by the control processing method (English keypad)

Figure 7-2. An example of the subsequent keypad that can input various symbols by the control processing method (Korean keypad)

Figure 8-1. 3 * 4 Case of existing mobile phone with various function buttons on top of numeric keypad

Figure 8-2. 3 * 4 Case 1 with various function buttons arranged under the numeric keypad

Figure 8-3. 3 * 4 Case 2 with various function buttons on the bottom of numeric keypad

Figure 8-4. 3 * 4 Numeric Keypad Case for Arrangement of Various Function Buttons

Figure 8-5. Case 1 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 8-6. Example 2 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figures 8-7. Example 3 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 8-8. Example 4 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 9-1. When the up / down / left / right movement button is used as an accel / decrease button, the function corresponding to each button is iconized and displayed on the LCD.

Figure 9-2. Example of symbolizing icons related to each number buttons and displaying them on the LCD

10-1 to 10-4. A Case of the Alphabet Consisting Separation Keypad in the Roman Alphabet

Figure 10-5. A case of abbreviated input method in consonant separated keypad and case of processing input value as promised simple code in parallel input method

Figure 10-6. A Case Study of the Alphabetic Separation Keypad in the Roman Alphabet

Figures 10-7. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method in the Consonant Separation Keypad (1)

Figure 10-8. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method in the Consonant Separation Keypad (2)

Figure 10-9. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method on Incomplete Vowel Separation Keypad

Figure 10-10. Application of Parallel Input Method (In a System with All Words) (1)

Figures 10-11. Application of Parallel Input Method (In a System with All Words) (2)

Figures 10-12. Flowchart for applying parallel input method (in system with all words) (1)

Figures 10-13. Flowchart of applying the language restriction parallel input method (in a system with all words) (2)

10-14. Application of Full Input Method (and Parallel Input Method) to Full Code in System

10-15. Case Study on the Application of Parallel Input Method in Systems with Indexes of Words or Phrases Consisting of Representative Alphabets (1)

10-16. (2) Cases of application of parallel input method in system with index of phrase (word or phrase) consisting only of representative alphabet (2)

Figures 10-17. Example of processing the recommended sound input as a simple code (shortened input value)

Figure 11-1. Example of system configuration when input values are interpreted on the client side

Figure 11-2. System configuration example when input values are interpreted on the server side

Figures 11-3 through 11-10. Example of simple code processing (in parallel input method)

Figure 11-11. Example of simple code (ie short code or short input value) type

Figure 12-1. Example of inputting functions by control processing method

Figure 12-2. Example of displaying the control assigned to each button on the LCD screen

Figures 13-1 to 13-4. Example of processing part of input value as full code and other part as simple code

Figures 14-1 to 14-2. Example of control method using long press

Figure 14-3. Example using long press and short press

Figure 14-4. Short press followed by long press

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to an alphabet input device and method thereof in a keypad, and more particularly, to an alphabet input device and a method thereof in a keypad having a small number of keys such as a telephone keypad.

With the development of mobile communication, a function of transmitting and receiving digital information such as text has been added to a voice call-oriented portable terminal. Therefore, initially, a keypad provided in a portable terminal for the purpose of inputting a telephone number also includes a means for inputting a character. However, since the size of the keypad used as an input means of the portable terminal becomes smaller, the number of buttons included in the keypad has its limit. On the other hand, the alphabet of each language greatly exceeds the number of twelve keys included in the keypad. Therefore, in order to input one alphabet by using the telephone keypad, one or two or more buttons on the keypad must be combined to represent the alphabet.

In summary, the invention presented in the applicant's prior application (Application Nos. 10-2000-0031879 and PCT / KR00 / 00601) is as follows.

First, according to the "partial full selection method", a predetermined number of grids are formed in a form corresponding to the arrangement of all buttons in the keypad to each button on the keypad, and the alphabets are arranged on the grids, and the alphabet to be input (hereinafter referred to as "target alphabet"). By pressing a combination of the first button and the second button on the keypad corresponding to the arrangement position of the alphabet in the grids of the first button, abbreviated as ", " For example, in Fig. 1-1, "A = [1] + [2].

Among the grids of buttons, some grids are used, including the reference grid where the first and second buttons are the same, and some grids are used, but the convenience of the combination of the first and second buttons is high. Using a grid of orders first was the key to the partial partial selection method. The core of the partial partial selection method lies in the reference grid, and the keypad that can utilize the concept of the reference grid is named "reference keypad."

Next, the standard repeat selection method is the number of pushes of the buttons in the order of close proximity to the reference grid from the alphabet of the reference grid position on the reference keypad configured to apply the partial full selection method. According to the method was to select the alphabet. The standard repetition selection method is to apply the repetitive selection method to the standard keypad. The dedicated keypad selection method is named "simple keypad". For convenience, the repetitive selection method is applied to the simple keypad as conventionally used. This is called the simple repetition selection method.

There was a "control processing method", which included "subscript control method" and "following control method". The subscript control method was a method of inputting a modified alphabet by combining a subscripted control and a basic alphabet when inputting a modified alphabet consisting of a subscript and a basic alphabet. Subsequent control processing method sets a group of alphabets assigned to a button in the relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, and inputs the subsequent alphabet by combining the representative alphabet and the sub-orders attached to the representative alphabet when entering the subsequent alphabet. It was to make it. For example, in FIG. 4-1, it can be entered as "ㅋ = ㄱ + [*]".

Subscript control and subsequent alphabet control processing are essentially similar and subsequent control processing is considered more general. In the case of subscript control processing, it is considered that the modified alphabet is attached to the basic alphabet in a certain alphabetic group in a certain order. In the case of the superscript control process, since the modified alphabet can be decomposed into subscripts and basic alphabets, the alphabet group has a strong association in its shape, and the subsequent control has a strong association in the order or pronunciation. to be.

The advantage of applying the control treatment method is that it is possible to simplify the arrangement of the keypad by not displaying the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet) on the keypad through the relationship between the basic alphabet and the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet). The control process allowed the alphabets to be entered without ambiguity. The simplified keypad, excluding the subsequent alphabet, was referred to as "sequence keypad." The simplified keypad, excluding the modified alphabet, was called "simplified keypad." Keypads displaying all subsequent alphabets (or modified alphabets) were referred to as "full display pads" in contrast to simplified keypads.

In the whole display pad, it is possible to input subsequent alphabets (or modified alphabets) through the control method. On the contrary, in the simplified keypad, the user who remembers the layout of the whole display pad can use the input method in the whole display pad. . Thus, one of the characteristics of the first application was the compatibility of the entire keypad to be configured by expanding the simplified keypad and inputting subsequent alphabets through the control method according to the user's convenience in the entire display keypad.

One of the effects of applying the control treatment method is, in addition to the effect of eliminating ambiguity, by "hiding" the subsequent alphabets without displaying them on the keypad through the relationship between the representative alphabets and the subsequent alphabets, as shown in the earlier application, The keypad can be simplified. This is called "hidden control method" for convenience. However, as mentioned in the earlier application, subsequent alphanumeric characters (or modified alphanumeric characters) may also be entered through the control method in the entire display pad where the keypad is displayed. This is called "non-hidden control method" for convenience.

Since it is essential to give a specific example in view of the characteristics of the present invention, the details will be described through the embodiment.

First, the contents of the application for each language are supplemented as follows. It is obvious that any of the contents mentioned in any one of the following languages can be applied to other languages without being specifically mentioned in other languages.

1. Common Supplements

1.1 Scope of application of the keypad in the present application and the present invention

It is apparent that the keypad disclosed in the present application and the present invention can be applied to all fields in the form of a telephone keyboard, such as a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard or a keypad or door lock configured in software on a screen. In addition, the numeric keypad provided on the standard keyboard is different from the arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons presented in the earlier application and the present invention, it is apparent that the arrangement on the keypad button in the prior application and the present invention can also be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard. For example, in the present application and in the present invention, the alphabet disposed on the [1] button is placed on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and in the same manner below, alphabet input, utilization of simple codes, and memorization of various codes. Can be used for

1.2 Setting the Delay Time and Its Delay Time

In languages where consonants and vowels appear alternately, such as Korean and Hindi, a method of assigning a pair of representative consonants and a representative vowel to each button, and selecting one consonant as two vowels, For example, if the algorithm is implemented to recognize the same button two strokes input within the interval of 0.1 second) as a vowel, it can be efficiently implemented while reducing the objection to the user. This delay time should be determined in consideration of the time interval that is commonly pressed for a certain time when the same button is continuously pressed. This delay time is referred to as " hit delay time " for convenience. In addition, it is possible to implement to recognize two consonants of the same button two input more than a certain delay time (for example, one second) interval. This delay time is referred to as "ita delay time" for convenience. This may also be applied when pressing the same button more than three strokes.

For example, if [1] + [1] is input with a delay time of 0.08 seconds in Fig. 4-1 or 4-2, it is first recognized as a vowel “ㅗ”, and if the delay time is 1.1 seconds. If it is entered with, it is primarily recognized as two consonants ("a", "a"). If it is input with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, it is possible to determine whether one vowel is input or two consonants are input through the consonant and the appearance structure of the vowel. In addition, even when a delay time of 0.08 sec or 1.1 sec is input, it is possible to finally determine whether one vowel is input or two consonants are input through the consonant and the vowel appearance structure of the language.

Previously, only one time interval (for example, 1 second) was set, and if the same button was continuously input within the corresponding time, it was recognized as two strokes consecutively. . The difference is that the reference time delay value (e.g. 0.1 second) determined by two consecutive strokes is different from the time delay value (e.g. 1 second) judged by one stroke each.

In general, it is considered that the repetition selection method is superior in terms of convenience of input among the partial partial selection method and the repetitive selection method of the prior application. Therefore, this means that the ambiguity can be largely avoided by using the structure of a specific language in which consonants and vowels alternate, while taking advantage of the repetition selection method (simplification and convenience of input rules). By setting the delay time differently and allowing the user to specify, there is an advantage that the implementation of the algorithm can be simplified.

1.3 Chain Control Method                     

In the previous application, the subscript control method is essentially the same as the subsequent control method, and the subsequent control method is the more general method. In other words, in the Korean example of the previous application, the relationship between a, ㅋ, and 설명 was explained as the relation between the representative alphabet and the modified alphabet, and it was explained as ㅋ = a + {beep}, ㄲ = a + {beep}, but a (represented alphabet) This is because the result is the same even if it is placed in the relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet such as ㅋ (2nd) and ㄲ (3rd).

In the Japanese of Fig. 2-1, the input example by the subsequent control processing method is shown again as follows.あ (representative alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th) as shown below. 1]), and place 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th control on any control button (ex. [*]) And repeatedly select it according to the number of button presses. can do. For convenience, the control is selected with braces. For example, when applying post-control input, あ = [1], い = あ + {2nd} = [1] + [*], う = あ + {3rd} = [1] + [*] + [*], え = あ + {4th} = [1] + [*] + [*] + [*], お = あ + {5th} = [1] + [ *] + [*] + [*] + [*]

Here again, the relationship between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, such as あ (representative alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th), place the subsequent control on the control button and repeat the selection method. Rather than selecting it, you can select the "Continue" or "Next" control by pressing a specific control button (ex. [*]) Once, and enter the secondary alphabet (e.g. Enter a combination of "next control" (ie い = あ + {next} = あ + [*]), and enter the preceding alphabet after the third alphabet after the third alphabet. It can be entered as a combination of the second and subsequent alphabets and the "next control". That is, う = い + {next} = [1] + [*] + [*]. Likewise, if you enter the fourth alphabet after え, the preceding alphabet (third alphabet) is regarded as the new representative alphabet for the fourth alphabet, and you can enter え = う + {next} = You can enter [1] + [*] + [*] + [*]. The same applies to the fifth successor alphabet.

This result is the same as the input of the combination of the representative alphabet and the subordinate ranking control while placing the subordinate ranking controls (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, ...) on the control button and selecting them by the repeated selection method. . Here, if the first representative alphabet あ can be selected without ambiguity, it is easy to see that the second successive alphabet い can be entered without ambiguity, and the same is true for the remaining subsequent alphabets. That is, え = い + {next} = [1] + [*] + [*], where い can be entered without ambiguity, and い is also combined with "next control", resulting in subsequent alphabets without ambiguity. You can enter え.

In this relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, it is assumed that only one "next" control is provided without a subordinate control on the control button, and the preceding alphabet is regarded as a new representative alphabet when the subsequent alphabet is entered. The method of inputting a combination of controls is called "chain-type follow-up control method" for convenience. Although the prior application does not display subordinate controls on subsequent control buttons, the user only needs to know that a particular button is a subsequent control button. However, the advantage of this chained subsequent control method is that the "next control" is displayed on the control button. Even if it is displayed, the display can be simplified. In the present invention, since the results of the "subsequent control processing method" and the "chain-type subsequent control processing method" described in the prior application are the same, they are used interchangeably.

1.4 Skip Control Action

In the superscript control method, it is shown that the combination of .. and e can be entered in inputting the modified alphabet ё consisting of ".. + e". Or you could put e as the base alphabet and the rest of the attached alphabet that has a relationship in shape or rank, as a follow-up alphabet, and enter it as a combination of sub-order and base alphabet (e.g. e (basic alphabet), ^/ e (2nd), ^{^} e (3rd),... In addition, the control buttons, which can be placed only in combination with alphabets (ie, specific number buttons), can be used to enter a modified alphabet or a subsequent alphabet without ambiguity.

For the Roman alphabet, 11 variants of the alphabet ( ^/ e, ^{^} e, `e, ё,` a, ^{^} a, ^{^} i, `u, <sup>^</sup> u, c, <sup>^</sup> o) are used and are used for the variant alphabet. There are 5 kinds of dot (/, ^, `, .., s). If the selection order of subscript control is /, ^, `, .., s, you should input <sup>^</sup> a = a + [*] + [*]. However, in French, the alphabet a can only combine two subscripts, `` "and" ^ ", so that the subscript" / "cannot be appended, and if it is skipped, a subscript" ^ "is selected to allow the combination of <sup>^</sup> a = You can type a + [*]. This is called "skip control processing" for convenience. In other words, this is the same as entering a subsequent alphabet (or variant) as a control method, with the sub-alphabetic subscripts like a (basic alphabet), `a (2nd), ^{^} a (3rd).

Similarly, in Japanese, the only long lines are つ of the alphabets of line あ, や, and た, and the only lines of turbid sound are kan, さ, た, ほ, and semitones. It exists only in the alphabet of lines. As a result, it can be seen that there are two modified alphabets of long sound and tuck sound in the alphabet つ, and two modified alphabets of tuck sound and semi-tuck sound in the alphabet of row. Therefore, it is possible to press the subscript control button once when inputting the modified alphabet of the remaining alphabet except for the six alphabets in which the two modified alphabets exist. For example, if you set the control button to [*] button and apply post-control input, you can do ぁ = あ + [*], が = か + [*]. In the case of six alphabets in which two variant alphabets exist, the control can be selected in order of use of the modified alphabet when inputting the modified alphabet. For example, if you set the control button to [*] button and apply post-control input, っ = つ + [*], づ = つ + [*] + [*], ぼ = ほ + [ *], ぽ = ほ + [*] + [*] This means that in selecting controls, controls that cannot be combined with the default alphabet will have no effect. For example, even if が = か + [*], [*] can be treated as selecting a long sound control rather than a long sound control, the basic alpha bet KA combined with the control has no long sound, so the long sound control is not selected. This is because the skip sound control is selected.

The advantage of strict control selection is that it allows input of alphabets that are not actually used. For example, there is no alphabet with the subscript ".." in the French alphabet b, but it is possible to input such an alphabet, and there is no alphabet with a check mark in the Japanese alphabet あ, but such an alphabet can also be entered. You can do it.

Even if the control is selected as the repetitive selection method, if the representative alphabet displayed on the keyboard can be entered without ambiguity when entering through control processing (for example, there is only one or several representative alphabets displayed on the keyboard) ), The remaining subsequent alphabets can also be entered without ambiguity. This is because the ambiguity is removed through the control process, because the control does not represent a specific alphabet by itself, but must be combined with another alphabet.

1.5 Input by control method of number and English alphabet

As presented in the previous application, it has been explained that it is possible to arrange the national language alphabet in "order close to the reference grid", and then to place numbers and English alphabets. It has been explained that alphabets and numbers can be selected. Likewise, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the local alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also a number and an English alphabet (if not in the Roman language) can be input through the subsequent control processing method.

Numbers or English alphabets may be placed in the alphabet following the national language. For convenience, in the case of Japanese, for example, あ (representative alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th), 1 (6th),. (7th), q (8th), z (9th) can be placed. In addition, if there are available buttons for controlling numbers or English alphabets, the control buttons for あ (represented alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th) can be selected as For example, the [*] button), and the other button (for example, the [#] button) as a number or a button for English alphabet, あ (represented alphabet), 1 (2nd),. (3rd), q ( 4th), z (5th) can be entered to enter numbers or the English alphabet. For example, 1 = あ + [#] = [1] + [#],. = あ + [#] + [#] = [1] + [#] + [#], q = あ + [#] + [#] + [#] = [1] + [#] + [#] It becomes like + [#]. If a control button is available, you can set a separate control button for entering numbers and a control button for English alphabets.

This can be applied to other languages, and can also be applied to input of various symbols described later.

1.6 Grouping according to the pronunciation of the English alphabet

In constructing the keypad for each language in the previous application, considering the application of the control processing method and the use for memorization, the alphabet was grouped into similar pronunciation groups and assigned to each numeric button. In the case of English, the method of assigning each group to each number button by grouping alphabets by 3 or 4 according to the dictionary order is widely used, but similarly, it is possible to group and assign each number button in consideration of the similarity of pronunciation. The following are some examples of grouping English consonants into nine groups according to the similarity of pronunciation.

B P / C S X / D T / F V H / G K Q / J Z / L R / M N / W Y

BPV / CSX / DT / FH / GKQ / JZ / LR / MW / NY

The following is an example of grouping English consonants into eight groups.

B F P V / C G K Q / S X / D T / J Z / L R / M W H / N Y

BFPV / CGKQ / SX / DT / JZ / LR / MN / WYH

Many variations are possible in addition to the above examples. Five vowels can be placed in a grouped group of two. This can be convenient when applying the short input method using the simple code described later. In the case of a non-English language, in assigning the grouped English alphabet to each button, the non-English language can be assigned in consideration of similarity with the native language pronunciation group. For example, in the case of Korean, the G, K, and Q groups are assigned to a button assigned a similar letter "ㄱ". In Japanese, the G, K, and Q groups are assigned to a button assigned a similar letter "か". Therefore, even in the grouping of the English alphabet, it can be grouped in consideration of the national language alphabet grouping of each language.

2. Supplements for Each Language

In the following, the contents of the application for each language are supplemented and developed. If the content described in the supplement for each language can be applied to another language, it is obvious that it can be applied in other languages without special indication.

2.1 English

In the case of English, it is possible to input alphabets other than the representative alphabets on the keyboard even through the control process, as the subsequent alphabets can be entered through the control processing method in the entire display pad. In English, subsequent controls (2nd, 3rd) can be placed on the same control button (for example, the [#] button), or can be placed separately from each other (for example, [*], [ #] button). In the case of English, when ABC is placed on one button, if A is represented as a representative alphabet, B and C are input through subsequent control processing, and if B is represented as a representative alphabet, A and C are subsequent control processing. It is entered through. As mentioned in the earlier filings, the sub-categories of representative alphabets and subsequent alphabets may be determined in consideration of the frequency of use.

For example, in the A, B, and C groups, if A is the representative alphabet, the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed on the [*] button, and the control is applied, then B = A + {2nd} = [2] + [*] , C = A + {3rd} = [2] + [*] + [*] If B is the representative alphabet, the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed on the [*] and [#] buttons, respectively, and the input is applied after the control, A = B + {2nd} = [2] + [*], C = B + {3rd} = [2] + [#]. 1-2 is an example in which the alphabets in the center of each group of alphabets are placed in the center with representative alphabets in the center, and subsequent alphabets are disposed on the left and right sides. D = E + {2nd} = [3] + [*].

Thus, inputting only the representative alphabet as one button belonging to the representative alphabet and entering the rest of the alphabet by the control processing method is called "Control Processing Method Except Representative Chanracter" (CPMERC) for convenience.

In addition, when four alphabets of P, Q, R, and S are assigned to the [7] button, and four alphabets of W, X, Y, and Z are assigned to the [9] button, as indicated in the Korean embodiment of the earlier application, In addition, one of the four alphabets may be placed on a grid forming a top and bottom adjacent combination to apply the partial partial selection method. See Figure 1-3.

2.2 Japanese

In the case of Japanese in the previous application, the alphabet can be grouped based on 50 phonograms, and the subsequent control processing can be performed using the alphabets of the column (あ, か, さ,…) as the representative alphabet and the remaining alphabet as the subsequent alphabet. Said in an earlier application. In applying the sub-categories of subsequent alphabets presented in the earlier application, the 50th note may be simply applied, as in the following table, almost similar to the earlier method 3. This can be user friendly with the simplicity of the subordinates. N can be treated as if belonging to any representative alphabet, as in the previous application. In addition, it can be regarded as having a 50-digit alphabet (eg, い, う, え) attached to an empty space on the ya line or the wa line, or an n.

Method of election Simple use of 50 notes Standard grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th Standard grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th あ い う え お あ い う え お か き く け こ か き く け こ さ し す せ そ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の な に ぬ ね の は Hi ふ へ ほ は Hi ふ へ ほ ま み む め も ま み む め も や Yu よ や Yu よ ら り る れ ろ ら り る れ ろ W を ん W を

In the case of Japanese, the alphabet of the first stage, which is considered to be the most representative for convenience in Japanese, is represented as the representative alphabet.Also, the alphabet of any stage can be represented as the alphabet and the arbitrary alphabet from each group as the representative alphabet. You may. In addition, in assigning the alphabet of each row to each button, as mentioned in the earlier application, the row of buttons on the keypad is referred to ([1], [2], [3], [4],. ), Or you can assign columns to criteria ([3], [6], [9], [2], [5], ...). Similarly, you can assign them arbitrarily without assigning them by row or column.

Also, in the Japanese example of the previous application, when "ん" is set to the reference grid position of the [0] button and the [*] button and the [#] button have 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th controls, respectively, the [0] button is pressed. In order to use as a control button for long sound / bass sound / semitone sound, it was assumed that "N" is assigned to an arbitrary number button instead of [0] button. In this case, however, the "0" may be placed at the reference grid position of the [0] button, and additionally, the long sound / taking / half tone sound control may be arranged in the order close to the reference grid, and the repeat selection method may be applied to the control selection. This is because "ん" does not appear consecutively in a single word. See Figure 2-1. The alphabets which do not appear consecutively are selected to the button 1 on which the alphabet is arranged, and the 2, 3,... Allowing other controls to be selected can also be applied to all other languages. This property is also used in the method using the vowel elements of Korean described below.

2.3 Arabic

There are 28 consonants in Arabic. Group the Arabic consonants with the meaning of numbers in the previous application as follows and assign them to the keypad buttons, place each alphabet with the meaning of the smallest number as the representative alphabet of each group at the position of the reference grid and rest the alphabet Has been suggested to arrange on the keypad in order from the alphabet with the meaning of the small number to the reference lattice (explained in the previous application). In addition, the previous application suggested a method of inputting the alphabet by the control process in the case of Japanese, Roman-based languages, Korean, Indian, and Arabic. In the case of Arabic as well, vowels that are rarely used are regarded as subscripts, and a subscript control method has been suggested.

Here, we will present a method of controlling Arabic consonants. The following is an example of grouping Arabic consonants and assigning them to each button.

Among the alphabets having the meaning of 1, 10, and 100 assigned to the [1] button, the alphabet having the meaning of 1 may be displayed on the keypad with a representative alphabet, and the alphabet having the meaning of the remaining 10, 100 may be subsequently controlled. The control button can use any button as in the previous application. When the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed using the [*] button for the subsequent control button, the average input stroke is 2 strokes for the consonant input. Since only one alphabet is placed per button, it is not necessary to select the partial partial selection method in selecting the alphabet displayed on the button. Since the arrangement of the alphabet is conceptual, it may not be arranged on the keypad as described below.                     

Again, as in the Japanese case of the earlier filing, subsequent controls can be separated by other buttons. For example, if the 3rd control is distributed to the [#] button, the average input stroke is about 1.7 strokes ((1 + 2 + 2) / 3) and 28 consonants can be entered without ambiguity as suggested in the selection. do.

The present application shows an example in which an alphabet with a small number is represented as a representative alphabet of each group regardless of the frequency of use of the alphabet of each unit, and an alphabet with a small number is also selected first in the alphabet of the remaining units. . The control can be pre-input or post-input.

= [*] +

가 되고,

= [*] + [*] +

가 된다. 나머지 알파벳에 대해서도 동일하다. 이 경우 [#]버튼을 모음컨트롤처리를 위해 사용할 수도 있다. If all the following controls are placed in the [*] button, the alphabet of 1 unit is set as the representative alphabet, and the control button pre-input is applied when the 10 unit alphabet is selected.

= [*] +

Become,

= [*] + [*] +

Becomes The same is true for the rest of the alphabet. In this case, the [#] button can also be used for vowel control processing.

= [0] 이 된다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳으로 처리할 수도 있다. 이 경우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

가 될 것이다. 혹은 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳이 70의 의미를 가지는 알파벳(

)에 윗점이 붙은 형태이므로, 윗점컨트롤을 각종 모음컨트롤에 앞서 선택되도록 하여 컨트롤처리하는 것도 가능하다. 즉 윗점컨트롤 선입력시

= [윗점컨트롤] +

로 입력할 수 있는 것이다. 윗점이 붙어 이루어진 다른 알파벳에도 이러한 윗점컨트롤처리를 다른 입력방법과 병행하여 허용할 수 있다. 이 경우 [0] 버튼을 다른 용도의 컨트롤버튼(예를 들어 모음컨트롤버튼)으로 활용하는 것이 용이하게 된다. If only one alphabet with the meaning of 1000 is placed on the [0] button,

= [0]. The alphabet meaning 1000 can be treated as a group alphabet. in this case

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

Will be. Or alphabet with a meaning of 1000 is an alphabet with a meaning of 70 (

), With the dot attached, it is also possible to control the dot control by selecting it before various collection controls. In other words, when inputting the point control

= [Point control] +

Can be entered. This dot control process can be allowed in parallel with other input methods in other alphabets with dot characters. In this case, it is easy to utilize the [0] button as a control button for another purpose (for example, a vowel control button).

= [#] +

가 된다. 이 경우도 선출원의 일본어의 경우와 같이 입력시,

= [*] + [*] +

을 병행하여 허용할 수 있다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳에 속하게 할 경우, 경우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

혹은

= [#]+[#]+

가 된다. 즉 [*] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 그리고 [#] 버튼에 3rd, 4th 컨트롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 생각하면 된다. 아랍인들이 우에서 좌로 가로쓰기를 하는 점을 고려하여, 즉 [#] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배정하고, [*] 버튼에 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배치하는 것도 가능하다. If you separate the control and set the 3rd control (here 100 unit control) to the [#] button, the alphabet meaning 200

= [#] +

Becomes In this case, too, at the time of input as in the case of Japanese of the previous application,

= [*] + [*] +

Can be allowed in parallel. If the alphabet meaning 1000 belongs to one group alphabet,

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

or

= [#] + [#] +

Becomes In other words, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th controls are arranged on the [*] button, and the 3rd, 4th controls are arranged on the [#] button. Considering that the Arabs write horizontally from right to left, it is possible to assign 2nd, 3rd, and 4th controls to the [#] button and 3rd and 4th controls to the [*] button.

In Arabic, this means that the common consonants of about 1.7 strokes can be entered without ambiguity, and the Arabs know the meaning of the numbers in their native alphabet, so be sure to use the alphabet on the keypad (eg, 1 There is a great advantage in that the alphabet can be entered without displaying the unit alphabet, that is, the representative alphabet. In other words, when applying the method in the present application through the keypad displayed only with numbers, which unit alphabet is the representative alphabet, which unit is the control button for which unit alphabet, and the subsequent control uses one control button. If you are familiar with the rules, such as the order of selection for each subsequent control and whether you have previously entered the control buttons, you can enter most alphabets (Arabic consonants) needed in real life.

As pointed out in the earlier filings, vowels can also be controlled. If both [#] and [*] are used for consonant control, an alphabet with a meaning of 1000 is assigned to the [0] button, as in the earlier Japanese. Instead of arranging it, it is placed in the [1] button for control processing, and the [0] button can be designated as a control button for vowel processing, and a subscript type vowel (collection control, subscript control) can be selected by the repeated selection method. Similarly, the vowel control (subscript vowel) is selected according to the number of button presses in order of frequency of use. If only one [*] is used as the subsequent control button for consonants, you can use [#] as the vowel control button, or you can use both [#] and [0].

In the example of FIGS. 3-1 and 3-2, an alphabet (1 unit alphabet) having a meaning of 1 to 9 is represented as a representative alphabet of each group. However, the most frequently used alphabet in each group may be represented as a representative alphabet. . And in order to reduce confusion, the alphabet of any unit among 1 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 1 to 9), 10 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 10 to 90), and 100 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 100 to 900) It can also be a representative alphabet. Fig. 3-3 shows the 10-alpha alphabet as the representative alphabet and puts the alphabets (100-unit alphabet, 1-unit alphabet) assigned to the left and right by using the control buttons assigned to the left and right by the control processing method. This is an example.

Similarly, the alphabet selected by the subsequent control may be the alphabet of each unit according to the frequency of use. For example, if 100 unit alphabet is the most frequently used, and this is the representative alphabet, and 1 unit alphabet is the most frequently used, the 2nd control (that is, 1 unit control here) and the representative alphabet can be entered. The 10 unit alphabet can be entered by combining the 3rd control (that is, the 10 unit control) with the representative alphabet.

In the previous application, it is possible to input subsequent alphabets through the control processing method in the entire display pad. Likewise, it is possible to input consonants by the subsequent control processing method and the vowels by subscript control processing method in the keypad of the previous application. . In the 3 * 4 keypad, if the vowel subscript control button is set to the [0] button, it is possible to distribute the control button for consonant input to the [*] button and the [#] button.

2.4 English

2.4.1 Application of various controls

4-1 to 4-3 are methods of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel in Korean to each button, and inputting the basic consonant and the basic vowel displayed on the keypad by a repetitive selection method. In FIG. 4-1, the vowels, the horns, and the extended vowels are input by the control processing method. In FIG. 4-3 illustrates an example of inputting a vowel, a horn, a basic vowel, and an extended vowel by a control processing method.

2.4.2 Program Implementation

4-4 are merely examples of flow charts for implementation and more efficient programming is possible. For example, if the consonant portion of the support in Figure 4-4, by checking whether the consonant that can achieve the double support, it is possible to implement a slightly more efficient.

The Korean example presented in the earlier application can be applied to other languages that have similar characteristics (a structure in which consonants and vowels alternate). In the case of other languages, the characteristics of the appearance of other languages should be reflected.

For example, if you want to construct a Hindi input system using a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels, you can implement it similarly to Korean, reflecting the characteristics of Hindi. This is simpler and easier to implement.

2.5 Hindi

In the Applicant's application, Hindi consonants are grouped into nine groups and assigned to the [1]-[9] buttons, so that the vowels assigned to the [0] buttons are selected with one [0] button. You can group them into groups and always choose one consonant and ten vowels. Vowels ___ (ri), which are not placed on the keypad and are not frequently used, can be processed by the control method. In grouping consonants into 10 groups, a grouping method is possible considering the similarity of pronunciation as suggested in the earlier application. An example of grouping into 10 groups is as follows.

And the first vowel ___ (a) in Hindi can be omitted between consonants and consonants. That is, consonants come out in succession. In this case, it is very easy to display "consonants + consonants" even if you input "consonants + ___ (a) + consonants". Of course, it is also possible to input "consonant + consonant" directly, but in this case, the same representative consonants are selected in succession, which increases the possibility that two consonants can be recognized as one vowel. Therefore, both (automatic omission of the collection ___ (a) or user omission input) can be allowed.

2.6 Myanmar

There are 33 consonants in Myanmar: This can be grouped into 9 or 10 groups as in the example of Hindi, the representative alphabet can be set, and the remaining consonants can be input by the subsequent control processing method.

3. Multidimensional Intersection Control

Figure 2-2 shows an example of assigning alphabets of the "A" column in alphabetical order to the buttons according to the above table. In the case of the previous application, the 4nd and 5rd controls could be additionally assigned to the control buttons assigned to the 2nd and 3rd controls, but here, only the 2nd and 3rd controls are assigned to minimize input strokes and make the most of the control buttons.

The method of inputting subsequent alphabets in Fig. 2-2 is as shown in the previous application. For example, after control input, い = あ + [*]. Next, the method of inputting the alphabet, long sound, half sound, and half sound sound of each alphabet. In FIG. 2-2, all of the buttons available as control buttons ([*] button and [#] button) are used as subsequent control buttons. Therefore, there is no control button for the modified alphabet. However, if the basic alphabet of the target alphabet is the subsequent alphabet, the subsequent control button which is not used as the subsequent control button after inputting the subsequent alphabet can be used as a modified alphabet control button (referred to as "the opposite control button" for convenience). .

For example, ぃ = い + "opposite control buttons" = あ + [*] + [#], ご = こ + "opposite control buttons" = か + [#] + [#] + [*] . This is regarded as a modified alphabet of the basic alphabet i, and in applying the control method, it can be seen that the opposite control button which is not used as a subsequent control button for inputting a is used as a modified alphabet control button. As in the example, the skip control method of the previous application can be applied here as well. From the point of view of the chain control processing method, by pressing the control button on the opposite side once, it is regarded as selecting the "next control" for inputting the alphabet (변형 in the example) of the input alphabet. Can be.

There are two types of modified alphabets in the alphabet: row, halftone and halftone, so you can press the opposite control button once for long sound and twice for the halftone sound.ぶ = ふ + "opposite control buttons" = は + [*] + [*] + [#], ぷ = ふ + "opposite control buttons 2 times" = は + [*] + [*] + [# ] + [#]

Next, if the basic alphabet of the target alphabet is a representative alphabet, the above method cannot be applied as it is. In this case, in addition to any button of the subsequent control button, the modified alphabet of the representative alphabet may be placed as a subsequent alphabet to input the target alphabet.

For example, if you use the [*] button to enter a variation of the representative alphabet (long sound, sound sound, half sound), you will get あ = あ + [*] + [*] + [*]. In other words, the modified alphabets of the representative alphabets (long sound, sound sound, and half sound) are regarded as 4th successive alphabets that can be input by using the [*] button. The above is summarized as follows.

Using the opposite control buttons to expand the use of the control buttons and to use them for more alphabets or other inputs is called "cross control processing", "zigzag control processing" or "multidimensional cross control processing" for convenience. . This may also apply to using three or more buttons as control buttons.

In the above table, it is obvious that the columns of the remaining columns except for the first column can also be used for inputting other alphabets or symbols. In the example above, the opposite control button is applied once. In other words, when inputting ぷ, ぷ = 반 + "press the opposite control button 2 times" = は + [*] + [*] + [#] + [#] repeatedly and use the opposite control button repeatedly. The opposite control button ([#] button) is applied to the [*] button only once. This is referred to as "two-dimensional cross-control processing" or "two-step cross-control processing" for convenience.

That is, when only one control button is used to input one alphabet, this may be referred to as "one-dimensional control processing". This can be thought of as using a control button "one-dimensional". However, in the two-dimensional (crossover) control processing method, two different control buttons are used to input one alphabet. In other words, when ご is input, ご is regarded as a modified alphabet of こ and ご = こ + "opposite control buttons" = か + [#] + [#] + [*], where the opposite control button is already represented Although it is defined as a control button for entering 1st and 2nd subsequent alphabets of KI and KU, it is possible to use the opposite control button ([*] button) as the modified alphabet control button for inputting こ 's modified alphabet ご. It is. This can be seen as using two control buttons "two-dimensional" as compared to using one control button one-dimensionally for one alphabet input.

ぷ = ふ + "Press the opposite control button one time" + "Press the opposite control button one time for the previous control button" = は + [*] + [*] + [#] + [*] have. In other words, if it is not possible to input the variant alphabet repeatedly by using the control button ([#] button in the example) that was finally used for the input of 으로, use the opposite control button for the other control button again. You can enter a variant or subsequent alphabet. This is called "three-dimensional cross control process" or "three-step cross control process" for convenience. This means that the cross control method can be used to infinitely expand the number of possible inputs for the alphabetic or other alphabetic inputs that can be entered on the keypad. Moreover, there is a big meaning that a subsequent alphabet or modified alphabet having a relationship with a pre-input alphabet can be naturally input by a control processing method.

The above description will be given in the form of a graph, for example, in the case of row A in which two modified alphabets (muck sound, half sound sound) exist, as shown in Fig. 2-3. In Fig. 2-3, the circled ".." in dim color is the same as that which can be used to input other alphabets or symbols in the empty space in the above table, if you wish to enter additional characters (alphabet). Or symbol) can be input by the multidimensional control processing method. In FIG. 2-3, the [*] button and the [#] button are used in the perpendicular directions, respectively.

In the previous application, assign [*] button to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th control instead of the representative alphabet among 50 alphabets, and use the [*] button as a control button to input variation alphabets such as long sound, table sound, and semitone sound. Compared with the method used, it can be seen that the two-dimensional control process is applied to the method of the previous application. That is, ぃ = い + {variation} = い + [*] + [#] because two control buttons are used. The difference is that in the previous application, the use of the control button was used only as a follow-up control button (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) and only as a modified alphabet (long sound, sound sound, anti-sound) control button. After entering the alphabet, the subsequent control buttons were used again as modified alphabet control buttons. In order to distinguish the main use of the control button (following control button in the example) as the modified alphabet control button from the two-dimensional control processing method of the previous application, the "two-dimensional recycling control method" or "two-dimensional multi-purpose control processing method" I will call it.

The method of filing an application has the advantage of a simple and consistent input method, but has a relatively large number of input strokes. In order to show the difference with the present invention, the graph shows the case where the control buttons were used only as the subsequent control buttons (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) and the modified alphabet (long sound, sound sound, anti-sound) control buttons, respectively. Same as Figure 2-4. In Figs. 2-3 and 2-4, the portions shown in bluish color can be extended and applied.

In the application of the cross-control processing method above, an example of post-control input is shown, which is also input by control pre-input, just as control pre-input or post-input can be applied in applying the control processing method in an earlier application. You may. For example, ぃ = "opposite control buttons" + い = [#] + [*] + あ. However, it may be convenient to enter the control afterwards when applying the cross control method.

The same can be applied not only to Japanese but also to all other languages. For example, if [*] and [#] are used to input a subsequent alphabet by applying the representative alphabet control control method in Arabic, a multidimensional cross control processing method can be used to input a subscript type vowel. have. In addition, in the case of using the [*] button and the [#] button as a control button for inputting a subsequent consonant and a subsequent vowel in Thai, the tonal code can be input.

4. Korean input method

4.1. How to use vowel elements in Korean

In the past, there were methods of assigning alphabets to each button and inputting alphabets by a combination of each stroke (eg, →, ↓, ↙, ↘, ⊃, O, etc.). Also, in Korea, there are cases where Korean vowels are separated into three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ =>, ie, Korean), and the alphabet is input from the keypad as a combination of vowel elements.

In Korean, vowels can be divided into several vowel elements. For example, you can think of it as three vowel elements (sometimes referred to simply as "three vowels") for ㅡ,., ㅣ and four vowels of ㅡ,.,:, | Call), and since ㅡ, ㅣ exist as the vowel itself, it can be considered to use the vowel element in the Korean input method on the keypad. Anyone who knows Korean knows that Korean vowels can input all the various vowels in Korean by combining three vowel elements or four vowel elements.

It will be described in detail through the following examples.

4.1.1. 10 consonants and 3 vowels

First, the basic alphabet for Korean input is 10 consonant pneumatic sounds (basic consonants), three vowel elements, and the horn and vowel sound control inputs (by combining basic consonants and controls). 15 factors can be considered. Since it should be assigned to a 3 * 4 keypad with 12 buttons and inputted, a basic consonant with no consonants and pulsations among the 10 basic consonants in 9 buttons (for convenience, "9-button dropping consonants" or "10-9 consonants" (Or more simply called "-9 consonants"), the remaining nine basic consonants are assigned to the nine buttons, and each of the three vowel elements, the vowel control, the horn control, and the three-button 9 consonant consonants randomly 2 You can group them individually and assign them to the remaining three buttons. The basic consonants assigned to the nine buttons are entered as the assigned button 1, the vowel element is entered as the assigned button 1, and the control grouped together with the vowel element "." Or the 9 button dropping consonants as the assigned button 3 can do. This is referred to as "10 sound consonant three vowel control method" or "three sound consonant control process". Here, the selection of the grouped together with the vowel element "." Or the button 3 stroke assigned the 9-button dropout consonant is described later, and it can be seen that the repetitive selection method is applied.

Here, it is a matter of course that 10 basic consonants are assigned to each of the 10 number buttons in order to utilize the Korean keypad for memorization. 4-5 illustrate one such embodiment. In Fig. 4-5, "ㅎ" is grouped together with the vowel element "." As a 9-button drop-out consonant and assigned to the [0] button which is a numeric button. This is because it can give a natural feeling to Koreans at the end of the order, while also giving less inconvenience even if they can't input with the assigned button one. In Figure 4-5, since the remaining basic consonants are also assigned to each numeric button in alphabetical order, there is an advantage of providing a good location identification (readability) to the user.

When inputting after control ㅋ = + {beep (control)} = [1] + [*] + [*], ㄲ = + + {beep (control)} = [1] + [#] + [# ]. In the applicant's application, as in the case of Japanese, the vowels "-" and "|" are not used in Korean, so that the vowel control and the vowel control can be selected by the repeated selection method. In the case of "ㅔ" or "ㅖ", the vowel "ㅣ" may appear consecutively, but the vowel element "." Because of this precedence, the system knows that pressing "##" is not a control but a vowel. Even though the control did not display the button on the previous application, the user only knew that the user could select the control by pressing the button. By assigning the sound control by grouping it together with the vowel “ㅡ”, the user intuitively chose the vowel “ㅡ”. You can remember to select the sound control by pressing the button to which "" is assigned twice. Likewise, by assigning the sound control with the vowel "|", the user intuitively presses the button to which the vowel "ㅣ" is assigned twice. There is an advantage that can be selected, this property is also one of the elements to be protected by rights in the applicant's invention, the same applies to the four-vowel method described below. This is not limited to the embodiments presented by the Applicant, and may be equally used in other applications, which are also included in the rights category of the Applicant's invention. For convenience, it is referred to as "a method of controlling the sound volume / beep control using a line-shaped vowel element (" ㅡ "," ㅣ ") button".

In the example of FIGS. 4-5, the vowel element "." Is implicitly placed by assigning the vowel element "." To the [0] button and implicitly placing it in the number "0" (red dot in the number "0"). can do. As a result, the Korean input system can be configured by concisely placing only one alphabet on the keypad. Similarly, as shown in Fig. 4-9, it consists of "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅇ". By placing "." Of "ㅎ" in red and assigning only one phoneme externally, a concise keypad can be constructed. .

Control of Sound / Hounds In the 10 consonant 3-vowel method, the sound can be input by pressing the button to which the basic sound of the sound is assigned twice (that is, by the concealed repetition selection method) instead of only the sound of the sound. . For convenience, this will be referred to as a "vowel repetition selection horn control processing 3 vowel method". Alternatively, the horn can be input by pressing the button to which the basic consonant of the horn is assigned twice (that is, by the concealed repetition selection method), instead of the control method only. It can also be seen as typing). For convenience, this will be referred to as "a method of selecting a repetitive rhythm control process repeatedly." Alternatively, both the sound and the sound may be input by a repetitive selection method without input by a control processing method. When inputting both the sound and the sound by the repetition selection method, the repetition selection order may be set as the basic consonant (1 stroke)-the sound (2 strokes)-the sound (3 strokes) (this is the default of the sound, ie double consonants). It is also possible to input a combination of consonants, and to separate the consonants into three buttons to which the basic consonants belong), a basic consonant (1 stroke)-a septum (2 strokes)-a hard sound (3 strokes). For convenience, the former case will be referred to as "first rhythm repeat selection three vowel method" and the latter case will be called "first rhythm repeat selection three vowel method". Some of the items described in this paragraph are collectively referred to as "trivial / beep repetitive three-bar method".

It is also possible to apply the "Beep / Horn Repeat Selection 3 Bar Method" while maintaining the 3 vowels of the Sound / Horn Control process. You can also apply Sound / Horse Control Processing While maintaining the 3 vowel method, it is possible to apply the repeated selection method of only the loud sound, or to apply the repeated selection method of only the loud sound, to apply the repeat selection method of the predominant sound, Various combinations are possible, such as applying the iterative selection method. On the contrary, it is possible to apply only the control method of the horn, to apply only the control method of the horn, or to apply the control method of both the horn and the horn while maintaining the triple vowel / beep repeat selection method. . Alternatively, the horn may be entered only as a control method, the rhythm may be entered only as a repetition selection method. On the contrary, the horn may be entered only as a control method and the horn may be entered only as a repetitive selection method (ie, a combination of basic consonants). You may. There may be further similar combinations as exemplified, which will be referred to as " combined triad method for repeated selection of sound control / sound control processing ". Generally, a case where an input method of a squeak and a stiff sound is not specified is generally referred to as "10 consonant trivo method" for convenience. It is also possible to allow the user to set a convenient input method for the input of the hard sound and the hard sound.

The frequency of ambiguity that occurs when the "Beep / Beep Repeat Selection 3-vowel method" is applied to both the sound input and the sound input is approximately 140 characters and one letter. It occurs much less than it occurs in Korean. It is also possible to additionally assign and arrange a sound or a sound to each number button, inputted by the repeated selection method or by the control processing method, which is also included in the scope of the present invention.

4.1.2. 10 consonants and 4 vowels

The examples of FIGS. 4-5 and 4-9 can be solved and expressed as shown in FIGS. 4-6. 4-6 can be applied to the same input method as in FIG. 4-5. As shown in FIG. 4-6, it is necessary to input a vowel element &quot;:" It acts as a horizontal or vertical stroke, but for convenience, the horizontal stroke ':' is grouped together with the vowel element "." And assigned to the same button, and the vowel elements "." And ":" are assigned to the same button. Each of the buttons 1 and 2, which are assigned by the repetition selection method, is selected, but the vowel element ":" is not explicitly placed on the button. Of course, the result is the same even if it is assigned explicitly as shown in Figure 4-6 and the alphabet displayed on the keypad by the iterative selection method. However, even if the vowel element ":" is not displayed on the button, the user intuitively enters the combination of the vowel element "." (Ie ":" = "." + "." = [0] + [0]) I can think of it. Finally, Figure 4-5 also uses four vowel elements ("-", ".", ":", "ㅣ"), one of the three vowel control, horn control, 9 button drop consonant vowel element ". Groups the "and vowel elements": "and assigns them to any button, and selects the". ",": "And 9-button dropout consonants (in the case of Figures 4-5) assigned by repetitive selection method respectively. However, the vowel element ":" may not be displayed on the button. This result is the same as the above-mentioned "10 consonant 3-vowel method", but for convenience, "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 3-vowel method" or "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 4-vowel method" or "10 Consonant point collection element repeated selection vowel element method ". The hard sound and the hard sound may be input by various methods described above. In fact, describing the same result or giving a special name, Figure 4-5 also uses four vowel elements and applies the repeated selection method, but it can be seen that the vowel element ":" is not simply displayed on the button. (Although the input method and the algorithm constituting the input system are the same as those shown in Figs. 4-6, even if not shown in Fig. 4-5), the Korean input system of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. has only three vowel elements. While it was an approach to use, the input system proposed by the applicant intends to emphasize what can be seen from different perspectives (using four vowel elements).

4-7 illustrates a case in which vowel elements ":" are not grouped together with vowel elements ".", But grouped into different groups. That is, four vowel elements (“ㅡ”, “.”, “:”, “ㅣ”) are assigned to different buttons, and for convenience, these are called “10 consonant four vowels” or “four vowels”. Since the four vowel method has many points in connection with the three vowel method, it will be explained in a relatively simple manner. Of the contents described in the three vowel method, the contents applicable to the four vowel method are obviously applicable to the four vowel method. The term can also be used similarly to the term used in the three vowel method.

Similarly in the four vowel method, each of the ten basic consonants except the two basic consonants with no consonants are assigned to eight buttons, and each of the four vowel elements, the consonant control, the horn control, and the eight buttons. Group two consonants that are not assigned to (conveniently called "8-button dropping consonants" or "10-8 consonants" or, more simply, "-8 consonants") into groups, and enter the vowel element into the assigned button 1, The assigned control or missing consonants can be entered using the assigned button 2 (ie, by the repeat selection method).

Here too, ten basic consonants may be assigned to each number button, thereby making it possible to utilize them for memorization. In addition, by assigning the vowel element "." To a similarly shaped [0] button and displaying it inside the number "0", a simple arrangement on the button can be achieved (or the appearance is similar even if the symbol inside the number is omitted, so the user can Easy to recognize), by assigning the vowel element ":" to a similarly shaped [8] button and displaying it inside the number "8" (or omitting the notation within the number, the user can easily recognize it). Only one alphabet can be arranged externally per button. As shown in Fig. 4-7, when the buttons to which the vowels “ㅡ” and “ㅣ” are assigned are the [*] button and the [#] button, when the various vowels of Korean are input, adjacent buttons are pressed to reduce the fingering distance. have.

In the case of the four vowel method, the repetition selection method can be applied to the input of the vowel and the horn as in the case of the three vowel method. In addition, as in the case of the three vowel method, it is possible to use a combination of the repeated selection method, which is collectively referred to as "multiple combination method of repeated selection of the sound control / beep control process".

The keypad of FIGS. 4-7 may also be solved and expressed as shown in FIGS. 4-8 from the viewpoint of the repeated selection method. 4-6 and 4-8, the difference between FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7 can be clearly seen. Fig. 4-8 shows the result of moving the vowel element ": " selected by the [0] button 2 in Fig. 4-6 to the [8] button and inputting it with one stroke. 6 and 4-8 are slightly different, but this can be done uniformly). You can also apply the vowel element ":" consisting of two dots to the vowel element ":" in the horizontal direction and the vowel element ".." in the vertical direction. ".", ":", "..", "ㅣ") may be referred to as "5 vowel method". However, as compared with the four-vowel method of Figs. 4-7, since there are not many advantages in terms of input stroke, recognition ability, etc., they are not mentioned in the present invention.

Collection element "." And ":" can be assigned to the [*] button and the [#] button, but in this case, the vowel elements are displayed in numbers as shown in Figs. 4-7, so that only one alphabetical surface cannot be placed. .

For example, referring to Figures 4-7, ㅕ =: + ㅣ = [8] + [#], ㅑ = ㅣ +: = [#] + [8], = = ㅡ +: = [*] + [ 8], when the 8-button dropout consonant is input by the repeated selection method, ㅁ = [8] + [8], ㅎ = [8] + [8]. If the collection element ":" the collection element "." If inputting with the two arranged buttons is allowed, " haha " can be inputted with the button 3 with the assigned "." As in the previous application.

For example, in the case of "Wo" or "Wee", the dot-shaped vowel element ".." between the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is entered as the vowel element ":". The system may recognize that you have entered "U + ..." temporarily, but the vowel "|" cannot appear after "U", so the system may recognize you as "W". In the "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 3 vowel method," enter the vowel element "." Twice when entering the vowel element between "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" in the case of "Woo" or vowel It can be understood by entering the element ":" once.

Some of the contents described above are described as follows. First of all, when inputting Korean on the keypad by applying the repeated selection method, the method using three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ) combines ten consonants, three vowel elements, and two controls (horn, vowel). The 15 elements are grouped and assigned within the 4 * 3 keypad to apply the repeat selection method, but "3 vowel elements" and "2 controls and 1 consonant sound (9 button dropping consonants)" are assigned to each grouping.

The method using four vowel elements (ㅡ,.,:, ㅣ) is used to group and assign ten consonants, four vowel elements, and two control elements together in a 4 * 3 keypad. Applied but assigned by grouping "four vowel elements" and "two controls and two consonants (8-button dropout consonants)".

In both methods, 10 consonants were assigned to 10 number buttons for the natural use of simple chords (especially syllable-based initial chords).

Applicants' 3 vowel method (collectively referred to as various 3 vowel methods) and 4 vowel method use various characteristics of a specific language (here, Korean) to apply the repeated selection method with little or no ambiguity. Here's how to enter it. This means that in inputting the alphabet displayed on the keypad by using a repetition selection method, in particular, in entering Korean, the Korean language repetition selection method among the "language restrictions input method" among the "language restrictions input method" presented by the applicant in the earlier application. The Korean input method optimized for "can be considered.

In fact, in the Korean Patent Application, the applicant applied a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels to each button and applied the repeated selection method, and the rules of appearance of Korean consonants and vowels (ie, word generation rule, alphabet) It is the same context that showed that the ambiguity in the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced by using a combination rule. When the Korean vowel (elements) "-" and "ㅣ" do not appear in succession in Figures 4-5 to 4-8 using three vowel elements or four vowel elements in Korean, they appear in succession (an example of a pre-application) In "ㅖ"), it is possible to select the rhythm control and the rhythm control assigned with the vowel element by the repetitive selection method by using the property to know whether the vowel or the control is entered. Can be.

4.1.3. Full control 3 vowels / 4 vowels and missing consonant button Full control 3 vowels / 4 vowels

In Fig. 4-5, even if the sound and sound are inputted by the control processing method, ambiguity may occur in the case of "Lee <=> Ahi", "Lee <=> Ahe <=> Yahi" (full code of quantum) Values are all the same). In the example, "ㅡ" is used instead of the vowel "ㅣ", and other similar cases may be known to a person who knows Korean. However, a large number of such cases do not occur in actual words, and can be effectively overcome by setting the "battery delay time" and "other delay time" mentioned in the earlier application. A similar case may exist in the four vowel method of FIGS. 4-7. In Fig. 4-7, there is no case of "Ahe <=> Yahi", but there may be a case of "and <=> Yami". However, this too is not the case and can be overcome by time delay. The number of occurrences can be examined based on the actual frequency of Korean consonants and vowels, but it is expected to occur in hundreds of characters in Korean, so virtually no ambiguity occurs.

Of course, as mentioned in the earlier application, in the three-vowel method as shown in Fig. 4-5, if the nine-button dropout consonant (“he” in the drawing) is regarded as a modified alphabet of “ㅇ” (hard or vowel), the input is unambiguous. It is possible. For example, ㅎ = ㅇ + {beep} = [8] + [*] + [*]. This is referred to as a "full control process 3 vowel method" for convenience. Similarly, in the four-vowel method similar to 5, the eight-button drop-out consonants ("ㅎ" and "ㅁ" in the example drawing) are controlled by the control method (for example, "ㅁ" as an alphabet of "b" as described). , "ㅎ" can be entered without ambiguity). For convenience, it may be called "full control processing four-bar method".

However, inputting 9-buttons / 8-button dropout consonants by full-control 3-vowel / 4-vowel method hinders the naturalness of simple code. Therefore, the present invention proposes to input a 9-button drop-out consonant (“” in the example) as a combination of a button and a control to which a corresponding alphabet is assigned in the three-vowel method (applicable only in the case of post-control input and explanation). For example, in the 3 vowel method of Figure 4-5 ㅎ =. + {Beep} = [0] + [*] + [*] It is as if the vowel element "." Is inputted as one button with the alphabet assigned to the 9-button drop-out consonant. Is to type like the alphabet. This method also eliminates ambiguity completely, and by using the [0] button for the input of "ㅎ", it is possible to maintain the naturalness of the simple code. This will be referred to as "a complete control processing three-bar method using the drop consonant assignment button" for convenience. The same applies to the four vowel method. With this method, "ㅎ" ends with a letter with a seed (e.g. ")" (eg "angle"), and when you type "ㅎ" afterwards, it is temporarily recognized as "go + ㅡ". Since the vowel "-" + "-" cannot come out in succession, the system recognizes that the user has selected a control, and the "high" vowel element "." Cannot be combined with a sonic control. The system recognizes that + ㅡ + ㅡ "is the type of" ㅎ ". If the initial letter ends with a vowel (eg "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "TT", etc.) that can be combined with the vowel element "." Without a seed, the input is entered to enter "ㅎ". The values "0 **" to "0" are temporarily combined with the preceding vowel, and the vowel "ㅡ" + "ㅡ" is entered and the system can recognize it temporarily. You know that the control is selected and you cannot combine it with the preceding vowel element ".", So the system knows that you typed "ㅎ". Furthermore, if the character ends with a vowel that cannot be combined with the vowel element "." (Except for "ㅣ", "ㅏ", and "TT"), the "0" button is entered. "," The system will consider and display to the user. Also, even if "0" is entered after [0], it can be regarded as "H".

Here, it can be seen that a button assigned with a vowel “-” should be used as a control button for inputting the dropped consonant in the three-vowel method (including the four-vowel method) in the full control process using the dropout consonant assignment button. As mentioned in the earlier application, "ㅔ" and "ㅖ" exist in Korean. The same is true for the four-combined full-control process using the dropout consonant button. Similarly, when inputting "ㅁ" assigned to the [8] button in FIGS. 4-7, it can be input as ㅁ = [8] + [*] + [*]. The input example in the 4 vowel control method using the dropped consonant assignment button is the same and is omitted.

4.2. Temporary language restriction delay

The previous application stated that "delay time of delay" and "delay time of delay" can be applied even if more than three alphabets are assigned to one button. For example, you can set the batter delay time to 0.1 seconds on a standard English keypad so that if the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 seconds, the system will assume that you have typed B.

Similarly, when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first and second input values (ie, the first [2] and second [2] buttons) If the delay time interval between them is within the time set as battering delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within time set as the batting delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) (i.e. [2] + less than 0.1 second + [2] + less than 0.1 second + [2]), C can be recognized by the system. Or when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]) and the total input time is within two times the batting delay time (eg 0.2 seconds), enter C You can also let the system know.

The various delay times mentioned in the earlier and main applications are summarized as follows.

Battering delay time ≤ time delay ≤ temporary language restriction delay time

All three delays may be set to be the same, but it may be desirable to set a longer delay time than the batter delay time and a longer time limit for the temporary language release.

4.3. Response between client system and server system

In an earlier filing (2000 applications with priority claims), the alphanumeric program on the keypad could be mounted on the terminal (client) side or on the server side. When mounted on the server side, the numeric input value is transmitted from the client side to the server side and the server side interprets the input value. In the whole system consisting of client (terminal) and server, it is possible to interpret the input value on the client side and transmit the character string to the server side. Apparently, this also applies to all the character input method of the applicant.

4.4. Use of buttons other than 4 * 3 keypad

In the previous section, we presented a method to fully process Korean input in a 4 * 3 keypad. However, a vowel element or a part of the vowel element may be assigned by using a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, in FIG. 4-5, when the vowel element "." Is assigned to a separate button, the dropped consonants "ㅎ" assigned together are selected as the assigned button 1 stroke. Similarly, in Figures 4-7, if the vowel elements "." And ":" are assigned to separate buttons (two may be placed on one button, or two may be placed on two buttons), the eight-button dropout consonant " ㅁ "can be selected by assigning one button.

In addition, a separate button may be used, but a vertical movement button, a high movement button, or a left movement button may be used which is not frequently used in a text input mode.

4.5. Typing of Korean Gore Alphabet

The present invention further proposes a method for allowing Korean Gore to be input through a keypad.                     

In Korean, the vowels that are rarely used in modern times (lost alphabets) are the lower vowels (indicated by "·"), the consonants in half-tone (indicated by the triangle "ㅿ"), and the soft hyssop ("ㅎ" without dots) 옛 "), old eunuch (" o "with a dot on top of it," 순 "), and jinpyeong (" ㅂ "with circle under" 아래 "").

Vowels in Gore are frequently used in relatively modern languages. For example, you can see it used in the trade name "ㄱ. ㅁ. 고을" and in the famous word processor "ㅎ. ㄴ글" made by Hangul and computer companies ("ㄱ. ㅁ. 고을"). "This is one letter and" ㅁ +. "Is one letter, and" ㅎ. As in the example, the lower vowels are used in various names, and thus can be usefully used for inputting a phone book.

In the applicant's earlier application, the lower vowel is the same shape as the vowel element ".", So that the lower vowel can be entered naturally by allowing the lower one to be inputted with the button 1 assigned to the vowel element ".". The input rules remain unchanged since no other vowels appear after the vowels (even if that is the case, the lower vowels of the Gore vowels are not often used, so no other vowels appear after the vowels). Of course, if the button assigned with the vowel element "." Is pressed twice, the system will recognize that it is to enter "ㅕ" or "ㅖ" rather than being entered twice consecutively below the vowel. Likewise, if the vowel element "." Is pressed twice in succession after the vowel "|", the system recognizes that it is for entering the vowel "ㅑ" or the vowel "ㅒ".

Gore's consonants can also be typed as a variation of the basic consonant (consonant flat). For example, the half-tone "ㅿ" is regarded as a variant alphabet of "s" (eg, a sonic sound), and the tender hyssop "ㆆ" is considered to be a modified alphabet of "o" (eg, a sonic or audible sound). Can be entered as a modified alphabet of "ㅇ" (beep or beep). In the case of pure sound "ㅸ", the input method can also be defined (e.g., an automata process that allows a combination of "ㅂ" and "ㅇ"), but it is an alphabet that is not actually used in modern Korean and is a variant of "ㅂ". As there are both audible sound "격" and a voic sound "하지" in the present invention will not be described in detail anymore.

For one example, you could enter "ㅸ = ㅂ + **** = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = ㅂ + #### = 6 ####". As mentioned in the input of various symbols, it is the same as inputting various symbols by repeatedly inputting a valid alphabet by using the control button repeatedly. "6 *** = f", but with "6 ****" you can enter the gore (the gore as a variant of the "ㅂ"). Likewise, various symbols can be entered by repeatedly using the control buttons (here, the [*] and [#] buttons to which the vowels "-" and "|" are assigned).

The input of Gore's consonants is equally applicable to other applicants' filings. However, the method of using the vowel elements (-,., ㅣ) among the applicants of the applicant has the advantage that the lower vowels can be naturally and easily input.

Through the present invention it is possible to input up to the Gore alphabet used intermittently in modern Korean. Currently, Korean Samsung Electronics' input method using vowel elements is not supported for inputting vowels below. Therefore, in the present invention, the biggest difference is that it is possible to input a lower vowel that is used in a special case even in a relatively modern language.

4.6. Characteristics of parallel input method

In the earlier application, "short / full parallel input method" or simply "parallel input method" has been described. For example, when the parallel input method using the full input method as the default input mode is applied, the system checks the input value every time an input value is input, and the input value does not form the full code of the specific full input method. As soon as the system recognizes it, the system treats the input value as a simple code (this is called "full-priority parallel input method" for convenience). On the contrary, when the parallel input method using the shortcut input method as the default input mode is applied, the system examines the input value every time an input value is input and the input value no longer exists in the index of the simple code to be searched. As soon as the system confirmed that it was, the system regarded the input value as a full code and processed it (this is called "short-priority parallel input method" for convenience).

In the case of using the "partial full selection method" as the pool input method, it has been explained that it is possible to treat the input value as a short code at the instant when the input value violates the full code generation rule in the pool-first parallel input method.                     

When the iterative selection method is applied as the pool input method, it is not explicitly known whether the input value violates the full code in the pool priority parallel input method. However, when the language limited iterative selection method is applied as the full input method, the system may treat the input value as a short code at the moment when the input value violates the word generation rule of a specific language.

In the method using three Korean vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ) (example of Fig. 4-5), the syllable-based initial code is used as a short code (i.e., used for indexing the simple code to be searched). Simple code means the syllable-based initial code.) In the case of applying the full-priority parallel input method, if "12 ~" is input as the input value, the second input value "2" is input, the input value forms Korean syllables (letters). Because the system cannot recognize that the full code is not achieved, the system can treat the input value as a simple code. Anyone who knows Korean is easily recognizable, but when the user enters a simple code (syllable-based initial code) when applying the full-priority parallel input method in a form similar to FIG. There is a good characteristic that you can see that the input value is a simple code at the time of input.

This is also the same context that the system treats the input value as a simple code (short code) when the input value violates the Korean word generation rule in Korean limited input method using three vowel elements of Korean language. In case of inputting "100 ~" as an input value in Fig. 4-5 using three vowel elements of Korean (full priority parallel input method), the system inputs "ㄱ +" or "bridge" to the user. .. "can be recognized and output, but if the fourth input value is input without the vowel element" ㅡ "or" ㅣ "and the numeric button is input, the input value can not be full code. The input value may be recognized as a simple code (short code), and a phrase corresponding to the input value may be output (visual means or audio means) with reference to the simple code index. Finally, in the form similar to that of Fig. 4-5, when the maximum input fourth input value is input when the full priority parallel input method is applied, the system can determine whether the input value is the full code or the simple code (the application of the three vowels of the horn / beep control process). city).

Likewise, in Fig. 4-7 using four vowel elements (ㅡ,.,:, ㅣ), when the user applies "18 ~" when the full-priority parallel input method is applied, the system returns "almost" or "high". In order to input, it can be recognized as the input of "ㄱ +." And output, but if the number button (corresponding to the consonant) is input as the third input value, the input value cannot form a full code, so the system Can be treated as a simple code. When up to three buttons are entered, the system has a good feature of knowing whether the input value is full or simple chord (when the four vowel method of the horn / beep control process is applied).

In Figures 4-5 and 4-7, the number button assignments of the basic consonants (consonant pyeonyum) are different, but FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7 are merely examples, so that the arrangement of the consonant pyeonyum can be kept the same. have. 4-5 implicitly assigns "ㅎ" to the [0] button, and in FIG. 4-7 implicitly assigns the vowel element "." To the number "0", it is also pointed out that the same. For convenience, the input method using three vowel elements is called "three vowel Korean input method (or more simply three vowel method or three vowel method)" similarly to Figs. The input method using the vowel element will be referred to as "four vowel Korean input method (or more simply four vowel method or four vowel method)".

4.7. Compatibility between 3-vowel keypad and 4-vowel keypad and application on memorized keypad and numeric keypad only

In the keypads of FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7, the buttons to which the basic consonants are assigned are slightly different, but the basic consonants of the two may be arranged identically. Example: The method described in Fig. 4-5) or the 10 consonant 4-vowel method (e.g., the method described in Fig. 4-7), which allows the user to select and use a method that is convenient for them (quantity compatibility). There is this. Furthermore, in the "memorization" keypad which assigns Korean consonants to each number button, the user can use the 10 consonants 3 vowels or the 10 consonants 4 vowels. Here, the user who is familiar with the 3 vowel method or the 4 vowel method will be able to use the simple code and input the Korean by the 3 vowel method or the 4 vowel method even on the keypad where the consonant sound is not displayed on the keypad. Applicant's protection scope includes using a simple code on a numeric keypad or a keypad displaying only consonant sound on 10 numeric buttons for memorization, and using Korean input by the 3-vowel method and the 4-vowel method. Inclusion is self-evident.

4.8. Input of missing consonants

If you apply the complete control method by applying the drop-out consonant "ㅎ" in the 3 vowel method in the previous application (after input control), you can enter it without ambiguity as "ㅎ = 0 ** =. ㅡ ㅡ = ㅗ ㅡ". Said it can. In addition, it was improved so that if the drop-out consonant "ㅎ" appears at the beginning of the word, it is possible to input it with [0] button 1 (because the vowel element '.' Does not appear at the beginning of the word). In addition, the vowel element "." Cannot be combined (that is, the vowel element '.' Is a vowel followed by a vowel except for 'ㅡ', 'ㅣ', 'ㅏ', 'TT'). "Can be entered with one [0] button.

When "ㅎ" is entered with the [0] button 3 strokes, the vowel element "." It is pointed out that when this vowel ('.combinable vowel') is followed by "ㅎ", as described, ambiguity may occur, such as "<<> Ahe <=> Yahi". In order to input, it is possible to input "ㅎ = 0 **" or "ㅎ = 0 *" by applying the full control processing method. In addition, when inputting without ambiguity, it is recommended to input "0 **" rather than "0 *" for regularity of input method. Here, when entering the dropped consonant "ㅎ", when the repeated selection method is applied by using the button assigned with the dropped consonant, "." Comes after "." It can be seen that ambiguity can occur only in special cases. On the contrary, if the consonant is followed by "ㅎ", you can enter "ㅎ" without ambiguity with the [0] button 3 strokes. In other words, if you enter "ㅎ" after a consonant, you can enter "ㅎ" without any ambiguity by applying either "0 **" or "000".

Here, when ".combinable collection" comes after "ㅎ", it can be seen that "0 *" can be input. This is because "." Is not combined after ".combinable collection" in Korean.

To summarize the above, in order to make the input of the dropped consonant "ㅎ" as convenient as possible, when the head of the word and ". Non-combinable vowel" appear after "ㅎ", enter with the button 1 assigned the dropped consonant, "." "" Can be entered as "0 *" or "0 **", and "000" when "ㅎ" is displayed after a consonant.

Of course, you can always input "ㅎ = 0 **" for regularity of input method. At this time, it is also possible to coexist with the input method of "ㅎ" summarized above. For example, at the beginning of the word "0 = ㅎ", then "*" is pressed to "0 * = h", once more "*" is pressed again to "0 ** = ㅎ" will be. If "*" is pressed again, "0 *** = ha" is pressed again, and if "*" is pressed again, it becomes "0 **** = ha".

Likewise, if you press "0 *" to input "." After ".combinable collection" and then press "*" again, it will be equal to "0 ** = ㅎ" (the input method is set to '0' ** = ㅎ '), so when "*" is pressed again, it might be "0 *** = h".

Although the three vowel method has been described above, the same can be applied to the input of the dropped consonants in the four vowel method. In Figures 4-7 and 4-8, when entering "ㅁ" assigned with ".." in the [8] button, when the missing consonant "ㅁ" comes at the beginning of the word, the corresponding button [1] When the vowel element ".." assigned together cannot be combined (ie, the vowel and the vowel elements except the vowel '-' and the 'ㅣ'), the "ㅁ" is followed by the [8] button. You can type. Likewise, if a consonant is a falling consonant "ㅁ", you can enter "ㅁ" without any ambiguity with the corresponding button 2. In addition, if a missing consonant "ㅁ" comes after the vowel that the vowel elements assigned together can be combined, it can be input as "8 *". Of course, even in the case of the 4-vowel method, it is possible to simply apply the full control processing method using the assigned dropout consonant button and to apply the control processing method that regards the dropped consonant as a modified alphabet (gap or beep) of the other basic consonant. Do.

In addition, in the input of a symbol, it is possible to apply a control processing method by using a basic consonant in which there is no horn / horn.

4.9. Example of input of symbols

Whenever possible, enter a combination of a button assigned a basic consonant with no tremor / horn and a vowel element button (especially the "-", "-" button that can be used like a control button). It will be convenient. In other words, it can be regarded as the application of the input method of the sound / sound.

For example, various symbols can be input as shown below with reference to FIGS. 4-5, and the following contents are already presented in the earlier application, and are similar in other character input systems as well as in the character input method proposed in the present invention. Obviously, it can be applied (i.e. using control methods).

▶ Exclamation Point (!) = 2 **: can easily be associated with "Ne = 2 * ..."                     

▶ Slash (/) = 2 ##: can easily associate with "me = 2 # ..." of "Division"

▶ Tilde (~) = 4 **: Reminiscent of wave shape in "ㄹ" and "le" pronunciation

▶ Golvin (@) = 4 ##: Reminiscent of "ㄹ + ㅣ" in loop form of "@" symbol

▶ Question mark (?) = 5 **: can be easily associated with "water = 5 * ..." of "question mark"

▶ Period (.) = 5 ##: It can be easily associated with "De = 5 # ..." of "Period"

▶ Comma (,) = 5 ###: Enter "Period" and press "#" once more

▶ Colon (:) = 5 ####: Enter "Comma" and press "#" once more

▶ Semicolon (:) = 5 #####: Enter "Colon" and press "#" once more

If you use a character input system that does not use the [*] or [#] button as a vowel button, you can enter an exclamation mark by combining a control button (eg [*] button) with a "b" assigned to it. . In the input system where the [*] button or the [#] button is used as a control button instead of a vowel button, or even in a system used as a control button, as described in `` pure sound input '', the repeated pressing of the button and the control button You can enter the exclamation point in combination. For example, if you enter a modern language that takes precedence over Gore, and a button assigned with "ㄴ" and an arbitrary control button (for example, the [*] button) is pressed up to two times, enter "exclamation mark = ㄴ + ***". Can be.

Period (.) + "ㅣ" = comma (,), which also uses the property that the vowel "ㅣ" cannot be combined normally after a certain symbol (period in this example). If you want to enter the vowel "ㅣ" after the period, enter the period (.) And confirm the period by passing a certain time (e.g. as long as the language deactivation delay time) and enter "ㅣ" or enter the period (. After entering, you can enter a ". ㅣ" by entering the vowel "ㅣ" after confirming the period by pressing a specific button (eg right arrow or 'Blank + Delete'). The same applies to the input of the previously described Gore Hangul.

It is obvious that other symbols other than the exclamation point can be similarly applied in other input systems (combination of buttons and control buttons assigned with consonant Hangul consonants). This is possible.

In the above, the symbol input case optimized for the Hangul input method proposed in the present invention is shown. In other words, various symbols are inputted by using consonant buttons and vowel buttons (vowels “-” and “ㅣ” assigned) which do not have a vowel sound / sound. However, the Gore Jamo or various symbols can also be entered by using the consonant buttons with the voicing / hardening, as shown in the previous example, "경 = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = 6 ####". can do.

Furthermore, as in the case described in 10 and 11 below, when a vowel button is repeatedly pressed to select / enter various vowels, it is possible to input symbols and the like. For example, in FIG. 4-5, when "*" button is selected with one [*] button assigned to vowel "-", "TT" is selected with two strokes, and "ㅠ" is selected with three strokes (that is, the vowel is selected). "-", "TT", "ㅠ" in the order of the number of repetition pressing of the button), "5 *** = mu" will be.

Normally, a particular phoneme is selected in response to a repeated press of a particular button, such that the "maximum possible number of repetitions" (eg when the [*] button is pressed three times) is returned to its initial state (ie It is often the case that the selected state is cycled, that is, "5 **** = M." This is primarily a case of a typo being pressed more times than desired (but this is not the case. It is usually sufficient to use the delete function of the input unit suggested in the previous application) or "5 **** = 5 *** + * = mu ㅡ" but the normal sound "ㅸ" input As shown in Fig. 1, the system detects that an alphabetic character (vowel) that cannot be combined is input, and recognizes the entire input value as one specific alphabetical character (eg, a corresponding lattice sound, a gore or a specific symbol).

In this case (in case of collection "-", "TT", "ㅠ", it is selected according to the number of repetition presses of the button-where actually three vowels are displayed on the [*] button and some vowels) (Eg include all occurrences of the vowel "ㅡ"), you can enter "question mark (?) = 5 ****". When the [*] button is pressed consecutively after "5 ****", when a period (.) Is entered in the above example and then [#] is pressed next, a sequence of symbols (in the example above, Just as a comma (,), colon (:), semicolon (;), etc. in a broad sense can be recognized) can be recognized as a promised symbol. Thus, as a non-symbolic example, the lattice tone "ㅋ = 1 ****" may be entered as "key = 1 *****".

This allows the selected "ㅡ", "TT", and "ㅠ" to be selected according to the number of repetitive presses of the [*] button to which the vowel "ㅡ" is assigned. In addition, "Symbol Control 1", This can be seen in the same context as "symbol control 2", "symbol control 3", ... are selected. In other words, it is equivalent to "5+ {symbol control1} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". Likewise, according to the number of repetitive presses of the [*] button to which the vowel “ㅡ” is assigned, the promised “ㅡ”, “TT”, and “ㅠ” are selected. Also, according to the number of consecutive repetition presses, “2nd” and “3rd It is like having a subsequent control such as "," 5th "... selected. For example, "5+ {2nd} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". In other words, "ㅁ" is represented as "?" In [5] button. Is implicitly defined as the {2nd} subsequent alphabet. This can be seen in a similar context to the example of using a vowel button as a control button, as presented in the applicant's prior application (the application number is not clearly stated).

If the button assigned to the vowel "ㅡ" is used only as an input for "ㅡ", the maximum possible repetition of the vowel "ㅡ" following the consonant is 1, so enter as "question mark (?) = 5 **" This can be seen as possible. In this case, even when the maximum possible repetition number is one or more times (three times in the above example), various symbols can be input. Of course, even if the symbol is not recognized in combination with the consonant button, only the input of the vowel button may be recognized as the symbol. For example, if three vowels are inputted as "ㅡ", "TT", "ㅠ" according to the repeated pressing of the [*] button to which "ㅡ" is assigned, "5 **** =?" Without "**** =?" To recognize a specific alphabet (eg a symbol). However, this is not a good way to use the [*] button to enter only one symbol and the promised symbol when the [*] button is pressed in succession. In the case of the recognition with the consonant button, the combination with the [5] button in the example as well as the combination with other buttons (for example, a numeric button assigned with a consonant) can be recognized as a specific symbol (alphabet is also possible). It is obvious that the input of various symbols can be implemented with a small number of input strokes.

As described above in the application, the applicant can be regarded as using a button assigned with a vowel as a control button, and the control button may be pre-inputted or inputted after setting an input rule. In other words, you can enter "question mark (?) = 5 **" or "** 5". For example, if "ga" is entered and then "** 5" is entered, the system recognizes the input value as "ga?" As soon as the last "ㅁ" is entered in "ga + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅁ". . When "** 5" is entered after "Gam", the last input "5 **" is detected at the time of the last "ㅁ" in "Gam-L" and the input value can be recognized as "Gam?" have. The same holds true for the remaining cases.

In summary, in a method in which a specific vowel button is repeatedly used and a predetermined alphabet is selected according to the number of presses, a series of vowel button input values detected by the system by detecting the moment when the maximum number of repeated vowel buttons is input is exceeded. The combination of and a specific (consonant) button (a set of vowel buttons can be pre-input or post-input, as defined) is treated as the input of the promised alphabet (symbol).

This can be applied to various function inputs as well as alphabets (including symbols). When applied to the input of the function, as shown in the "Multidimensional Cross-Control Processing Method" of the applicant's prior application (when entering the alphabet by the N-dimensional cross control processing method, enter the function by the cross combination of N + 1 control button), It is preferable that the input of a specific function is made so that various alphabets (symbols, etc.) are inputted by pressing the control button repeatedly, and is made at the end. (E.g. 5 **** = question mark (?), 5 ***** = exclamation point (!), 5 ****** = enter function enabled)

If "5 ***** = Enter function activated" and "5 ****** = Exclamation mark (!)", Enter function is activated by "5 *****" and then [*] When the button is pressed, the system disables (cancels) the entered enter function and interprets the entire input value "5 ******" as an exclamation point (!), Because it is unnatural in implementation and confusing to the user. to be. This means that when the vowel button used as a control button is used for a maximum of N times when inputting various alphabets (including symbols), it is preferable to input the function by using the repeated pressing more than (ie, N + 1 times). to be.

4.10. Entering an arbitrary vowel using the vowel element "." (Eg vowel "ㅏ")

We have shown that the vowel element "." Can be used to enter the Gore "bottom" naturally. The vowel element "." Is similar in shape to the lower one, so it can be user friendly. If you enter the lower vowel element as ".", You can end the vowel combination at the beginning of the vowel combination (eg after consonant input) at the vowel combination process (ie vowel processing). If only the [0] button was pressed during the activation of a function, it is treated as a down arrow.

Basically, inputting a vowel using a vowel element forms a single vowel with a combination of vowel elements. The vowel combining process means from the start of vowel combination to the end of vowel combination. The vowel combination start state means that after inputting a consonant, activating a function such as a space, or when it is recognized that the currently input vowel is not combined with the previously recognized vowel. For example, when "*" is pressed in the vowel input "1 # * ... = Ki-...", the previously recognized vowel "ㅣ" and the vowel element "ㅡ" are combined to form another single vowel. Since it cannot be formed, it is recognized as a new vowel combination start state. Likewise, the vowel termination state means when a new consonant is recognized, when a function activation such as a blank is recognized, and so on. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the vowel combining process (from the beginning of the vowel combination to the end of the vowel combination) will be described as an example.

For example, "105 = a +. + ㅁ" would be a single letter with a lower vowel. When "1" is pressed to recognize a consonant and then "0" is pressed, the system first recognizes the beginning of the vowel combining process. For input value "10 ~", the system selects "ㄱ +." (The process of typing "ger", "cha", "high", or "school"). However, if it is recognized that "5" is pressed and the consonant processing starts and the vowel combining process ends, the input value "0" can be processed down. In other words, the input value "105" is recognized as "a => a +. => A +. + ㅁ". In this case, the use of the "+" symbol means that the word will appear as a vowel under the Gore (ie '.').

Of the three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", And "ㅣ" used in the three vowel method, "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" exist as vowels themselves, but only the vowel element "." Is combined with other vowel elements. Represents a Korean vowel. It is shown here that the vowel element "." Can be used to enter a single vowel (eg, "ㅏ"), which is often used in modern languages, without inputting the under which is rarely used in modern Korean.

Using the [0] button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned, it is advisable to input the modern Korean vowel "유사한" which is most frequently used and similar in pronunciation to Haha. something to do.                     

Entering the vowel "ㅏ" with the button to which the vowel element "." Has been assigned is similar to entering a down arrow with the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned. For example, when "1" is pressed when entering "105", the system recognizes the consonant "a", and when the next "0" is pressed, the system will primarily ('0 **' or '000' If it is input, it becomes consonant process). Similarly for the input value "10", the system displays "ㄱ +." ) It can be recognized as an intermediate step of inputting "ger", "cha", "high", or "bridge", but the next time the consonant input "5" is entered (or a space to terminate the vowel combining process) And activating other functions), the system can complete the vowel combining process and recognize the input value "0" as the promised vowel "ㅏ". That is, for the input value "105", it is recognized as "a => a +. => Sense". If another vowel (eg 'ㅣ') is entered, it is obvious that the total input value will be "105 # = kamikaze".

The process of the example "105 = persimmon" is actually the same as the process of "a => period => is => persimmon" for "1 # 05". If " 5 " is pressed after " 1 # 0 ", the end of the vowel combining process is recognized and the vowel " However, when inputting “ㅏ = ㅣ +. = # 0”, the system outputs according to the input value similar to the process of writing the vowel “ㅏ”.

It is true that typing the vowel “ㅏ”, which is frequently used as the vowel element “.”, Is less natural than entering the vowel element “ㅣ” and “.” In sequence. But the vowel element "." This is not a problem since you can enter the vowel "ㅏ" as well as enter "ㅣ" as a combination of "ㅣ" and "." (Ie '# 0' in the drawing).

Here, the input of the gore down can be input as "00". Likewise, if you press "100", the system will enter "A +. +." As you type "bridge" or "bran". If the vowel buttons that can be combined with the next input do not come, but the activation of other functions that can terminate the consonant or other vowel combining process is recognized, the system recognizes "100" as "a + down". Done. "1005" = "a + downah + ㅁ". Again, if there is less need for input under Gore, other vowels, such as vowel "ㅓ", which are frequently used, can be input as two [0] buttons.

Some users may be less preferred because of lack of intuition about typing "ㅏ" instead of the lower element as a vowel element ".". For such a user, it is possible to input a down arrow with the [0] button 1 and input the vowel “ㅏ” with the [0] button 2. The process is the same as described above, so it is omitted. In this case, it is possible to input "= | +. = # 0" at the same time. Entering the vowel "ㅏ" with 2 [0] buttons (ie '00') to which the vowel element "." Is assigned is also more convenient than typing "ㅣ +. = # 0" for ease of input. The degree is high.

Whether the button assigned to the above vowel element "." ([0] button in the drawing) should be entered as "1" with one stroke or by entering Goa under one and entering "ㅏ" with two strokes. You can set it to your preference. Furthermore, it is possible to enter a vowel other than "ㅏ", which can also be set by the user.                     

Since the vowel "ㅏ" is an overwhelmingly frequently used vowel in Korean, it is preferable to input "ㅏ" over other vowels in order to input arbitrary vowels used in modern languages by using the vowel element ".". The vowel "ㅏ" has a frequency of about 22% of all Korean vowels. Also, if the frequency of use is "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", these three vowels are about 50% of the total frequency of Korean usage. That is, by allowing "ㅏ" to be input as the vowel element ".", It means that about half of the actual vowels that are actually used can be input by one specific button.

Although the above description is based on the three vowel method, the same can be applied to the four vowel method. That is, the vowel elements "." In the vowel combining process (combination start to vowel end) in FIGS. 4-7 and 4-8. If only the recognized vowel can be treated as a promised vowel (eg 'ㅏ'), and if the vowel element ".." is recognized (ie the [8] button input) it is then another promised single vowel (eg down or ' ㅓ '). In addition, it can be applied to the input system using the vowel elements currently used in Korea.

Since the vowel combining process means from vowel combination start to vowel combination end, you cannot combine other vowels in addition to these vowel inputs. This means that you can't enter "dog" as a combination of the vowel element "|" here and again with "10". "10 #" becomes "ㅓ" because the vowel combining process starts when "0" is entered and the vowel combining process continues when "#" is pressed. In other words, the above description can only be applied to vowel inputs that are used alone, not vowels that change by combining vowel elements (eg vowel "ㅏ" in "gam" or "ㅏ +" ").

Here, the vowel element ".", Which does not exist as a vowel alone, is a vowel element and a vowel (eg, a vowel itself) that can exist as a vowel but can be combined additionally. Vowels created by combining existing "-", "|", and vowel elements, and vowels that can be changed by additional vowel combinations such as "ㅏ", "ㅑ" ... etc.) are called "element collections" . Where "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" are both vowel elements and element collections.

4.11. Vowel input method using three vowels of modern Korean (eg "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ") and Korean input system using the same

The most common vowels in Korean are three vowels in the order of "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ". In particular, the vowel "ㅏ" is the most used vowel. Hereinafter, a method of processing Korean vowels using three vowels including "ㅡ", "ㅣ" and any one vowel (in this example, vowel "ㅏ") will be shown. As introduced in the previous application, the Korean alphabet uses 10 basic consonants and 13 alphabets of three vowels, “ㅏ”, “ㅣ” and “ㅡ” as basic alphabets, so in a keypad with 12 buttons, one consonant per button Illustrate an example with a vowel. However, in addition to this example, the combination processing may be equally applied to other cases.

In view of the invention in the prior application, Figs. 4-10 and 4-11 are examples in which a vowel "ㅏ" and a consonant "ㅎ" are provided in one button. In FIG. 4-10, in order to keep the keypad concise, the vowel “안에” is displayed in the number “0” of the [0] button, which is the same as in FIG. 4-11. In the example of FIGS. 4-10, the vowels "-", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ" may be selected / input by the [*] button, the [0] button, and the [#] button, respectively. Of course, this is only one example, and it is easy to see that modifications are possible. For convenience, the [*] button is the [*] button or the bar "-" button, the [0] button is the [0] button or the bar "ㅏ" button, and the [#] button is the [#] button or the bar "ㅣ" button. Let's call it. In particular, the [0] button assigned with the consonant "ㅎ" is sometimes called the "ㅎ" button.

In FIG. 4-10 and FIG. 4-11, the [0] button is primarily applied as a "ㅏ" button, so that a consonant ("H" in the example drawing) is not assigned to a button to which "ㅏ" is assigned. The same applies to the case. It can also be applied when consonants are assigned to the remaining vowel buttons or when they are assigned with arbitrary controls. However, the input of consonants assigned with the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" should not affect the input of the vowels. ("ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 1 **" Next, the vowel "-" is used in such a way that it does not affect the input of the vowel).

The following shows an example of inputting the remaining vowels using the three vowels presented in the present invention.

collection 3 collections combined Input value Confirmation
possible
Whether Example of output form during input Example of output form during input 2 One A 0

ㆍ 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ #0# O 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅏ # 00 4 ㅒ ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ # 00 # O 5 ㅓ ㅏ + ㅣ 0# 0

ㆍ 6 ㅔ ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ 0## O 7 ㅕ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ 00 # 00

ㆍ · 8 ㅖ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ 00 ## O 9 ㅗ ㅏ + ㅡ 0* 0

ㆍ 10 ㅘ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ 0 * # 0 11 ㅙ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ 0 * # 0 # O 12 ㅚ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ 0*# 13 ㅛ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅡ 00 * O 00

ㆍ · 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅏ *0 15 ㅝ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ * 00 # 16 ㅞ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ * 00 ## O 17 ㅟ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ * 00 19 ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ * # O 21 ㅣ #

In Table 1, enter Korean vowel using three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", but "." Is the same as entering the vowel "ㅏ" with the assigned button1. In Table 1, for example, it is defined as "TT = ㅡ +,", which means that the entire input value ("ㅡ + ㅏ") is used in Korean because the vowel "ㅡ" and the vowel "ㅏ" do not appear consecutively. ) Can be thought of as defining the system to recognize it as a vowel "tt". Since the vowel "ㅐ" is decomposed into "ㅏ" and "ㅣ", it can be natural to enter "0 #", but as "ㅐ = # 0 #" is defined as "모음 = 0 #". It is defined to be input. You can think similarly about defining combinations for the remaining vowels. According to the definition in Table 1, 21 Korean vowels can be entered without ambiguity.                     

When one vowel button is pressed in Table 1 and the vowel processing process (ie, vowel combining process) is started, when the corresponding input value of Table 1 is detected, the system identifies the vowels. do. For example, after one of the consonant buttons of [1] to [9] is pressed in Figs. 4-10, or after a consonant input is recognized by a series of inputs (eg, "1 ** = ㅋ") When one button of the vowel buttons ([#], [0], [#] buttons in Fig. 4-10) is pressed, the system recognizes that the vowel processing starts and the input of the vowel button and subsequent series By detecting the input of the input value (collection button), it is possible to identify the vowel corresponding to the input value according to Table 1.

However, in the case of vowels circled in (collection) confirmation (possible) in Table 1, it can be determined that the vowel is for the input of the input value, but the rest can be different vowels according to the next input value. have. For example, if "0 #" is pressed, the system may recognize the input of "ㅓ" according to Table 1, but if "#" is pressed once again, the system will enter the entire input value "0 ##". "Is recognized as a vowel" ㅔ ". In Table 1, since the other input value is added after "0 ##", the system does not recognize the entire input value as another input value, so the system is determined as the vowel "ㅔ" for the input value "0 ##". Can be recognized.

" 혹은 " ㄱㆍ" 혹은 "ㄱ@" 혹은 "가" 등의 형태 중의 임의의 한가지로 출력될 수 있다. 다음 입력으로 자음버튼이 입력되거나 자음의 입력이 인식되면(예를 들어 "1" 이 추가로 입력), 전체 입력값 "101"에서 중간에 입력된 "0"을 모음 "ㅏ"로 확정적으로 인식하고, "각"을 출력할 수 있는 것이다. 여기서 "ㅏ = 0" 으로 입력하도로 하였으나, "#0" 으로 역시 "ㅏ"를 입력할 수 있도록 하는 것을 허용할 수 있다. Likewise, in the case of a vowel without a circle in the column of Table 1, it can be recognized as another vowel according to the following input value. The vowel "ㅏ = 0" can also be a vowel such as "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ", ... depending on the following input, so when the vowel [0] button is pressed after a consonant (Eg "10"), the output is "ㄱ

"Or" a. "Or" a @ "or" a ", etc. can be output in any one of the form .. When the consonant button is input or the input of the consonant is recognized as the next input (for example," 1 " In addition, it is possible to definitely recognize "0" input in the middle of all input values "101" as vowel "ㅏ" and to output "angle", where "ㅏ = 0" However, it can be allowed to enter "#" as "# 0".

") 하여 줄 수 있으며, 확정적으로 인식되는 순간 다시 적절하게 표시(예. "각")하여 줄 수 있는 것이다. 마찬가지로 "10"이 입력된 후 단어의 종료(예. 공백, 입력의 종료 등)가 인식되면, 시스템은 기 입력된 "10 = 가"로 확정적으로 인식할 수 있는 것이다. 표1에서는 일부의 경우만 입력중 출력형태를 예시하였다. Here, the system is completely separate from the problem of "recognizing" the corresponding vowel for a particular set of input values (including all cases where the recognition is recognized temporarily) and "outputting (eg displaying on a liquid crystal)" the recognized content. Is a problem. (Depending on the system, there may be cases where it is not necessary to output the recognized contents, and whether or not to output the recognized contents is an optional matter.) For the temporarily recognized contents (here, the recognized vowels), Similarly, output in the appropriate form, taking into account that it may vary depending on the next input value (eg "a"

"), And can be displayed appropriately again (eg" angle ") as soon as it is finally recognized. Likewise, the end of a word (eg a space, the end of an input, etc.) after" 10 "is entered. Is recognized, the system can recognize the input "10 = a" decisively. Table 1 illustrates the output form during input only in some cases.

FIG. 11-1 is a view presented by the applicant of the present invention. The input value input through the keypad in the client is interpreted by referring to the memory in the controller, and the interpreted result (string) is displayed on the display unit. ) Or to the server side through a sender. The problem of displaying the interpreted character string on the display unit (e.g. liquid crystal, etc.) and the problem of transmitting it to the server side is an optional problem separately from the process of interpreting the input value. Also in the hardware configuration, unlike the exemplary drawings, it may be a problem that the control unit to include a memory, it is not an absolute one. Fig. 11-2 also shows an example of transmitting an input value from a client side to a server side and interpreting the input value on the server side in a diagram presented in a prior application.

Here, the right arrow "→" is applied instead of the vowel "-" and the down arrow "↓" is applied instead of the vowel "ㅣ", and the effect is similar. In Table 1, the arrows "→" and "↓" are applied instead of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". Instead of the vowels "-" and "|", it would be better for the user-friendliness to see the vowels "-" and "|" rather than "-" and "-" respectively on the keypad buttons. This is also the same in "vowel input method using four vowels" which will be described later. Furthermore, it is also possible to use shapes of horizontal lines and vertical lines similar to vowels "-" and "|".

Applicants proposed in the earlier application to enter the lower vowel with "." Assigned to the [0] button in Figures 4-5 is to use the [0] button as the "lower button" after all, the combination of the remaining vowels In this case, the three vowels "-", "|", "." The method of entering all the vowels with the three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ" is also assigned to a button assigned to the bottom of the vowel (indicated by "." In the drawing) (Figs. 4-5 and 4-9). This is essentially the same as the case with the [0] button), where you enter the most frequently used vowel "ㅏ".                     

Therefore, it is obvious that various properties set forth in the applicant's application can be used. For example, the input of the lattice sound / hard consonant sound by the repeated press of the button to which the basic consonant is assigned, the input of the vowel by the repeated press of the vowel button, the lattice sound by the control processing method (ie, combined with the vowel button) / Consonant inputs, vowels assigned with vowels (eg "ㅎ"), and so on. It is also possible to process consecutively entered "00" into a promised vowel at the beginning of the vowel process.

For example, if two inputs of the [0] button are promised as the vowel “ㅓ”, the first “1” input is recognized as “a” and the second “0” input is collected. Recognizes that the process has started, temporarily recognizes the vowel "ㅓ" when the third "0" is input, and recognizes the end of the vowel processing when the fourth "1" input is input, and recognizes the continuous input "00". It can be recognized decisively as "kV", and can be recognized as "shade" with respect to the input value "1001". In the lattice sound input of FIGS. 4-10 and 4-11, by inputting the control processing method to which the post-control input is applied, "ㅋ = a + {diaphragm control} = a + ㅡ + ㅡ = 1 **" can do. If up to "1 *" is entered, the system recognizes it as "G" but then sees the "*" entered in succession so that the system can deterministically recognize the entire input value as "1 ** = ㅋ". will be. If "*" is entered as the fourth input value after "101", the system recognizes the input value as "gag". This is so natural as a Korean automata on a 2 beol keyboard. Next, when "*" is input as the fifth input value, the last input "1 **" in "... 1 **" is recognized as "ㅋ" and is confirmed, so the entire input value "101 **" "For +" will be recognized. (註: When using the Unicode system, 'ㅋ' should be displayed as one letter as the final support of 'A', but it is marked as 'Ga + ㅋ' because only the KSC 5601 completion type is supported by the JPO electronic document editor. Means that "1 **" is set to "ㅋ" at the moment "1 **" is detected among a series of input values "... 1 **", that is, when the [ㅋ] button is pressed on the PC keyboard. It means you can process it and recognize it.

Similarly, in the input of the hard sound, it can be set as "+ = a + {sound control} = 1 ## = a + | + | The input of "ㅎ" also regards "ㅎ" as a modified alphabet of "ㅇ" (lattice sound) and input "ㅎ = ㅇ + {beep control} = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 8 **", or "ㅎ" can be regarded as a variant of "ㅏ" and can be entered without ambiguity as "ㅎ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 0 **". In addition, at the beginning of the word, "ㅎ" is replaced by one [0] button, and a collection of "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ", "TT", "ㅚ" (collection "ㅏ"-ie [ After vowels other than the 0] button-can be combined into other vowels, the ability to enter “ㅎ” with the [0] button 1 is the same as described in other embodiments. It is also possible to allow "0 **" or "8 **" to be recognized as "ㅎ" even if you can enter "ㅎ" with one button assigned to "ㅎ". It is also possible to apply a variant alphabet "3 + other" input method (eg "ㅋ = 111", "ㄲ = 1111"). This is very rare but can be ambiguous.

When the above consonant and vowel input methods are applied, consonants and vowels can be identified "deterministic" with respect to the input value. Therefore, combining Korean consonants and vowels constitutes Korean syllables (lump letters). Yes, it can be handled easily by applying the consonant combination automata on 2 bee keyboard. As a deterministic input method, the system can identify consonants and vowels, and there is no difficulty in understanding them.

It is said that "ㅓ" can be input by pressing the [ㅏ] button (that is, the [0] button) twice by repeatedly pressing a specific vowel button. That is, "00 = #" or "0 # = #". If you enter "00" only as "00", you can define "0 #" as "ㅐ" instead of "ㅓ" and enter as "ㅐ = 0 #". However, when "0 ## = ㅔ" is pressed down to "0 #", there is a point where "ㅐ" having a different shape from "ㅔ" may be displayed. For example, if it is pressed up to "10 #", it will be recognized (and displayed) as "dog", and if "#" is pressed once more, it will be recognized as "10 ## = crab".

In Table 1, "ㅘ = ㅘ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ = 0 * # 0" is defined. In addition, it can be defined as "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ = 0 * 0". Marked in "[...]" is a decomposed representation of the double vowels for better understanding. With this applied, when the [0] button is pressed after the vowel "ㅗ = ㅏ + ㅡ = 0 * (bottom ie the vowel" ㅗ "which cannot be combined with '.') Together with the [0] button, It becomes difficult to input the assigned consonant ("ㅎ" in the example) with one [0] button. However, it is possible to enter "ㅎ" by other means (eg 0 **, 8 **, 0 *, .. etc.). Likewise, it is possible to define "ㅙ = [ㅗ + ㅐ] = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ = 0 * 0 #". Definitions of "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" are defined in Table 1 as "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0) ", which can be applied at the same time as defined as" ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * # 0 #) ". It can also be set according to the user's selection. Defining "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" means that there are fewer input strokes. , Additionally (optional) enter "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * # 0 #)" It would be desirable to be able to. Defining "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" is defined as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00 Independent of ")" (ie, not defined as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)").

For reference, in the Korean keypad of Fig. 4-5 illustrated in the earlier application, vowel elements are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", which increases the naturalness of the input. do. Looking closely at "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", the vowel vowel "ㅢ", "ㅟ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ",. . We can observe pattern of double vowels. On the contrary, if they are arranged in the order of "ㅣ", ".", "ㅡ" as in the keypad of Samsung Electronics, the double vowels are not observed well. In addition, even in the input of the double vowels, there is a disadvantage that can not be entered naturally as flowing from left to right. Likewise, entering "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" reduces the number of strokes than typing "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0)" There is also meaning, but it increases the naturalness of the input. In the illustrated Korean keypad of FIG. 4-10, the Korean vowels are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ". To input "... # 0", the right button ([ #] Button) and then the left button ([0] button) is pressed to hinder naturalness.

Further, by setting "ㅓ = 00", it can be applied to a double vowel input such as "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" as in the case of "ㅏ = 0". For example, in Table 1, "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ = * 00 #" is defined, but "ㅓ" in "ㅝ" is set to "ㅏ + ㅏ = 00" and "ㅝ = [ ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ = * 000 " It is also defined as "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ" in Table 1, but "ㅓ" in "ㅞ" is set to "ㅏ + 00 = 00" and "ㅞ = [ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ = * 000 # ". As in the case of "ㅘ" and "ㅙ", "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 000)" and "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 000 #)" Apart from defining "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ = 00", it can be applied simultaneously with the definition of "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" in Table 1, or it can be optionally applied. If you define the input of "ㅓ" only as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)" and not as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)", you can use "ㅐ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)" You may be able to enter it.

"ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 000)", "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 000 #)", when pressed to "1 * 00", " Rule ", but when the [0] button is pressed once more, it is recognized as" Guo ". When [#] is pressed once again, it is recognized as an "arc". Likewise, in this case, since "* 000" means the input of a normal vowel (that is, "ㅝ"), the consonant assigned with the vowel after the vowel "ㅠ (= * 00)" It is obvious that you cannot enter "ㅎ" with one button assigned to). "

The above is an example of inputting all vowels using three vowels "ㅏ", "ㅡ", and "ㅣ" which are the most frequently used in Korean (about 50% of the total vowel usage frequency). It is obvious that the same may be applied to all similar cases. For example, it may include applying any vowels (eg, any other vowels including "ㅏ" or "ㅗ", etc.) except for "o", "|", "ㅏ" instead of "ㅏ". When "ㅓ" is applied instead of "ㅏ", it can be "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ", and the combination of vowels is composed by using the vowel ("ㅓ") which replaces the vowel "ㅏ" in the table above. Just do it. However, since vowel "ㅏ" is more frequently used than other vowels (as mentioned, 22% of the total frequency of vowels), it is not better in terms of input efficiency than using vowel "ㅏ".

To make this a bit more general, use the three vowels (and three vowel buttons) of the (element) collection "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and "X" to do the following: In the table below, the vowel used as the vowel "X" out of the 19 vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" among Korean vowels is the button to which the vowel "X" is assigned (ie, the [X] button) 1 It is obvious that other inputs can be made.

collection 3 collections combined X X One A ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + X + X 4 ㅒ ㅣ + X + X + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ X + X + ㅣ 8 ㅖ X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + ㅡ 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ X + X + ㅡ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + X + X 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

To make this more general, you can input a vowel by a combination similar to the above table using any of the three vowel buttons in Korean. For example, the vowels "A", "B", and "X" may be element collections, and the remaining vowels may be input by a combination similar to the following. It is also obvious that the vowels "A", "B", and "X" can be entered with one button to which each vowel is assigned. For the convenience of the user and to minimize the number of input strokes, it would be desirable to use three vowels containing "-", "|" and "ㅏ".

collection 3 collections combined X X A A B B One A B + X 2 ㅐ B + X + B 3 ㅑ B + X + X 4 ㅒ B + X + X + B 5 ㅓ X + B 6 ㅔ X + B + B 7 ㅕ X + X + B 8 ㅖ X + X + B + B 9 ㅗ X + A 10 ㅘ X + A + B + X 11 ㅙ X + A + B + X + B 12 ㅚ X + A + B 13 ㅛ X + X + A 14 ㅜ A + X 15 ㅝ A + X + X + B 16 ㅞ A + X + X + B + B 17 ㅟ A + X + B 18 ㅠ A + X + X 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ A + B 21 ㅣ

In Korean automata of generalized 2 beol keyboard, "ㅢ" is inputted by combining "ㅡ" and "". However, since the keyboard includes a plurality of vowel buttons, only a part of the vowels such as "ㅝ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ", "ㅘ", "으로", etc. can be inputted by the combination of the vowel buttons (that is, the vowel combination). Rule only). A vowel combination using three vowels ("ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ" or "ㅡ", "ㅣ", ".") Is the only difference that more vowels are entered depending on the promised combination. Fig. 4-14 shows a graph format of the vowel processing according to the vowel combination based on Table 1. In Fig. 4-14, “start” means the start of the vowel processing. ... "is pressed, the vowel process begins at the next consonant (ie" a = 1 "), the pressed vowel" 0 ". This is the same as the [b] + [ㅡ] Is entered, the system recognizes that the vowel combining process is started when the vowel button [–], which can be combined, is pressed, and recognizes the entire input value as "긔" when [ㅣ] is pressed. If [a] + [a] followed by [a] is pressed, the end of the vowel combining process started from the input of [a]. He is recognized that the entire input value to "pole" is obvious.

In the implementation of the program, it is also possible to implement and process the consonants and vowels recognized by the input values of the keypad as the input values of the 2 bee keyboard Korean automata program, but in view of the infrastructure characteristics of the character input system and various applications, It is pointed out that it is not desirable for precise implementation.

In the above description, even if the person who is not in the field of the art knows Hangul and has a basic knowledge of the software, the description is made to fully understand the system, but the present invention will briefly present a flowchart. A vowel button (eg [0] button) assigned with consonants (ie, dropped consonants) is called "(dropped) consonant vowel button" for convenience. Input the lattice and hard consonants by the control method (control after input, "ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ", "ㄲ = AZ + ㅡ + ㅡ") and drop the consonants (eg "ㅎ") It is also assumed to be input by the control processing method (eg "ㅎ = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ"). In addition, the input value is assumed to be 12 buttons on the keypad.

In the flow chart of Figs. 4-15, parts (1) to (4) are the same as the Korean automata of the conventional 2 beol keyboard, and only the parts (A) and (B) shown in gray are seen in the input system. It can be seen that this part reflects the characteristics of the input method. Part (B) indicates that after a series of vowel buttons are input, if a non-combinable consonant vowel button (eg, [0] button) is pressed, the consonant input assigned to the vowel button is recognized. In FIG. 4-15, if the first input value is the dropped consonant assignment vowel button, it is very simple to treat it as the input of the dropped consonant consonant assigned to the vowel button. Therefore, the flowchart is not shown for the sake of brevity. For reference, FIGS. 4-16 illustrate a process of processing a Korean automata in a 2 beol keyboard which is generalized by removing characteristic parts ((A) and (B)) in the input method shown in FIGS. 4-15.

4.12. Vowel input method using 4 vowels of modern Korean (eg "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "") and Korean input system using the same

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 4-12 and 4-13, a Korean input system that processes vowels using any combination of four vowels including "-" and "|" may be configured. For example, four vowels are available, including the frequently used vowels "ㅏ" and "ㅓ". These four vowels have a frequency of about 60% of the total vowels. Table 2 shows an example of using a combination of four vowels.                     

collection 4 collections combined Input value Confirmation
possible
Whether Example of output form during input Example of output form during input 2 One A 0

ㆍ 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ #0# O 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅓ #8 4 ㅒ ㅣ + ㅓ + ㅣ #8# O 5 ㅓ 8

or

ㆍ · 6 ㅔ ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ 0## O 7 ㅕ ㅓ + ㅣ 8# 8

or

ㆍ · 8 ㅖ ㅓ + ㅣ + ㅣ 8## O 9 ㅗ ㅏ + ㅡ 0* 0

ㆍ 10 ㅘ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ 0 * # 0 11 ㅙ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ 0 * # 0 # O 12 ㅚ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ 0*# 13 ㅛ ㅓ + ㅡ 8* O 8

or

ㆍ · 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅏ *0 15 ㅝ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ *8# 16 ㅞ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ + ㅣ *8## O 17 ㅟ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅓ *8 19 ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ * # O 21 ㅣ #

Since it can be applied in almost the same manner as described in the case of using the three vowels, detailed description will not be given. In Figs. 4-12, the vowel " '" As shown in Figs. 4-12 and 4-13, when consonants are not assigned to the [8] button and the [0] button, consonants are assigned to the buttons to which "-" and "|" are assigned. The same may be applied to the case as described above.

In Figs. 4-12 and 4-13, the positions (assigned buttons) of the vowels "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" may be interchanged. In addition, the definition of the collection combined by four vowels based on the drawings of FIGS. 4-12 and 4-13 may be defined as a combination in which "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" are interchanged in Table 2.

The user can operate the [0] button to which the vowel “ㅏ” is assigned as the lower button, and the [8] button to which the vowel “ㅓ” is assigned as the button with two lower buttons. It is easy to associate this with the shape of the number "0" and the shape of the number "8". After the system detects the start of the vowel process, it interprets the input as a vowel according to the rules set out in Table 2.

Similarly to the foregoing description, in the input of "ㅏ", "# 0" may also be recognized as "ㅏ", and in the input of "ㅓ", "0 #" may also be recognized as "ㅓ". . Similarly, if any vowel (eg vowel "ㅗ", "TT") is used as the four vowels with the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" instead of "ㅏ" and "ㅓ".

Using the four vowel buttons including the vowel "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and the arbitrary vowel "X", "Y", the combination of four vowel buttons used in modern Korean is entered. Can be as shown in the table. In the following table, the vowels used as the vowels "X" and "Y" among the 19 vowels except the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" of Korean vowels are the buttons assigned the vowels "X" and "Y" respectively. (Ie, [X] button, [Y] button) It is obvious that each can be input by one stroke.

collection 4 collections combined X Y One A ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + Y 4 ㅒ ㅣ + Y + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ Y + ㅣ 8 ㅖ Y + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + ㅡ 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ Y + ㅡ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ
or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ + ㅣ
or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + Y 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ

To make this more general, you can input a vowel by a combination similar to the above table using any of the three vowel buttons in Korean. For example, the vowels "A", "B", "X", and "Y" may be element collections, and the remaining vowels may be input by a combination similar to the above. It is also apparent that the vowels "A", "B", "X", and "Y" can be entered with one button to which each vowel is assigned. For the convenience of the user and to minimize the number of strokes, it would be desirable to use four vowels containing "-", "|", "와", and "ㅓ".

Also in the input of consonants in Figs. 4-12 and 4-13, it is possible to input as "ㅎ = 0 ** = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ" and "ㅇ = 8 ** = ㅓ + ㅡ + ㅡ". Is the same. Here, the consonant "O" with a high frequency of use is assigned to the [8] button along with the vowel "ㅓ", but it is inconvenient for input, but the arrangement of the consonant "O" may be appropriately modified.

4.13. How to input a specific (single) collection by continuous input of a specific button to which a specific vowel element (or collection) is assigned

In the illustrated drawings (FIGS. 4-5 to 4-9), the vowel element buttons are not assigned to the vowel / beep control and falling consonants, and are assumed to be used purely as the vowel element buttons. Therefore, it is assumed that there are separate control buttons, or the sound of beating and the sound of beep are selected by repeatedly pressing the button to which the basic consonant is assigned, and the dropped consonant is selected by repeatedly pressing the button to which the consonant is regarded as the basic consonant. .

The use of Korean vowels is in the order of "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT", and these six vowels account for about 77% of the total. In the input method using vowel elements, it was shown that a specific single vowel can be input by using the vowel element "." Which does not exist as a vowel itself. Furthermore, in the vowel combining process (from vowel combining to vowel combining), it is possible to detect the continuous input of only the same vowel element button so that any promised single vowel is recognized.

Pressing the button to which the vowel element "-" is assigned once will recognize the vowel "-" and if it is pressed once more in succession, the "TT" can be recognized. For example, in entering "gum", the combination of vowel elements may be entered as "1 * 05", but may also be entered as "1 ** 5". Likewise, when the button having the vowel element "|" is assigned once, "|" is recognized and if it is pressed once more, "ㅏ" can be recognized. For example, when inputting "persimmon", it means "1 # 05" or "1 ## 5".

As described above, when inputting a single vowel using the button assigned the vowel element ".", The vowel combining process is recognized as an intermediate process of inputting the vowel "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ", etc. Until you recognize the end of the "." Could be printed as However, when using buttons assigned with vowel elements "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", the vowel element (or vowel element) after the consonant (ie, the vowel combining process start state) is explained as described in How to Control Sounds and Sounds. By using the property that "does not come out consecutively (that is 'ㅡ + ㅡ') and that the vowel element" ㅣ "does not come out consecutively (ie" ㅣ + ㅣ "), Definite recognition and output For example, when "1 ## (5)" is input, "a => group => may be displayed as (=> persimmon)" depending on the input. In this case, if it can be recognized decisively, other vowel elements can be additionally combined as if inputted by a combination of vowel elements. That is, in FIG. 4-5, "1 ** # = ears" and "1 ### = dogs" can be obtained. If a specific vowel is recognized by repeatedly pressing the button to which the vowel element is assigned, and another vowel element can be combined and made into another vowel, the previous input value is recognized when the input of the vowel element that cannot be combined is recognized. Up can be recognized as the end of the vowel combining process and the current input value can be recognized as the start state of the vowel combining process.

It is also possible to enter another single vowel by pressing the button assigned the vowel three or more times. For example, if a button assigned with "-" is pressed three times, it may be able to recognize "ㅠ" (where you can enter "Guo" as "Kyu + | = 1 *** #"). Likewise, if the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned is pressed three times, it may be recognized as "ㅐ" as mentioned, or "ㅑ" may be recognized (of course, 'ㅐ' and 'ㅑ' are not compatible here. If you enter 'ㅐ' as 3 strokes, you can enter 'ㅑ' as 4 strokes). Again like "." It is possible to enter "ㅕ" with 4 strokes and "ㅛ" with 3 strokes of this assigned button. (In this case, it is assumed that the dropout consonants are not assigned to the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned, but only the vowel element is assigned.) As mentioned in the input of the dropped consonants, FIGS. By using the property that the vowel element "." Cannot appear three or more times in a row, it can be definitely recognized as "1000 = chaff" and "10000 = bridge". However, in the case of three or more inputs, there is no significant difference in the input of a combination of vowel elements or the convenience of input, and it is insufficient in the intuition of the input method.

The above result shows that the input convenience of some vowels with a high frequency of use is increased. To recap, it can be seen that the repetitive selection method is applied to a specific vowel (TT, ㅠ, ...) with similarity in shape as the subsequent collection of "ㅡ". Likewise, it can be regarded that the repeated selection method is applied to a specific vowel (eg, ㅏ, ㅐ, ㅑ, ... or ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅐ) as a subsequent collection of "ㅣ". Similarly, it can be seen that a specific vowel (eg, ㅓ, ㅗ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ...) can be inputted by the repetitive selection method using a button assigned with ".". In the method of using four vowel elements, the "ㅓ" and "ㅗ" are inputted by the repeated pressing of the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned, and the repeated pressing of the button to which the vowel element ".." is assigned. It is also possible to enter "ㅕ", "ㅛ" by the.                     

Using the button assigned the vowel element "ㅡ", in the order of "ㅡ, TT, ㅠ, ...", "ㅣ, ㅏ, ㅐ, ..." or "ㅣ, ㅏ, ㅑ for" ㅣ " , ㅐ, ... ", and using the button assigned vowel element". "To input vowel" ㅓ "," ㅗ "beginning with vowel element". " It is for illustrative purposes only and other specific collections may be input in a different order.

Herein, the concept of the present invention may be utilized in a method other than the method of using three or four vowel elements. For example, in an input system where six vowel buttons have six element collections such as "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT", "ㅑ" means [ㅏ]. ] Button 2, "ㅕ" is [ta] button 2 tata, "ㅛ" is [ta] button 2 tata, and "ㅠ" is [ta] button 2 tata. Likewise, two [ㅏ] buttons can be used to enter a more frequent “ㅐ”. Again, the same vowels among the vowels "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT" do not appear in succession, so they can be recognized immediately upon input. If you can enter 10 basic vowels like this, you can enter the remaining vowels as a combination of these 10 vowels (eg '예 = ㅜ + ㅜ' or 'ㅝ = ㅠ + ㅣ', 'ㅞ = ㅜ + ㅜ + ㅣ '). Similarly, it is possible to input other vowels (e.g. compound vowels, extended vowels) with three or more specific vowel buttons.

This means that the vowel element "." Can be entered by a repetitive selection method with the vowel "ㅑ" as a subsequent alphabet whose default collection is "ㅏ". This, too, with the convenience of input by repeated pressing without ambiguity, it can give a user a feeling of familiarity with the input similar to the process of writing by pressing a button. In addition, a button assigned with a vowel element "." Can be added separately, so that an input system having seven vowel buttons can be input by repetitive pressing of the element collection button or by combining with the vowel element ".". For example, "ㅕ" can be entered in combination with the [ㅓ] button, two strokes, or the [.] Button and the [ㅓ] button.

5. How to overcome ambiguity through indexes

When applying the iterative selection method, ambiguity may occur because several words are represented by one code. In the input example of Fig. 4-1, it is pointed out that there is an ambiguity in which "Goi" can be recognized as "Ho" and "Ho". In general, however, words are entered in word units. For example, the word "very" exists, but the word "meyer" does not exist. In Fig. 4-1, both have the same code value. Therefore, the terminal prepares and registers an index for words that may cause ambiguity for a specific keypad and a specific alphabet input method on the terminal (client) or server side. When “very” or “heavy” is input, when both are not distinguished by time delay, etc., if the word “very” is registered as the correct word in the index, the word that the user wants to input (hereinafter for convenience) "Target word") can be seen that "very". This applies only when ambiguities are indistinguishable from the system, and it is natural to distinguish them by the time delay value defined by the system (terminal or server side system) or by the user defined time delay value. . In other words, if a user intentionally breaks (using a time delay or a blank or right-handed button or other specific button) and enters "heap", the word is a target word, even if it is semantically wrong. Should be printed.

The method of preparing the index may register only the correct word ("very bad" in the example) for the word when ambiguity may occur, or register only the wrong word ("heaver" in the example). You can also register both the correct word and the wrong word, and the system only needs to know which word in the index is the correct word or the wrong word.

This can be applied to all cases of applying the repetition selection method on the keypad. For example, an ambiguity such as "country <=> Kuka" occurs in the input method of Samsung Electronics in Korea, and the same can be applied here. In addition, similarly to Fig. 4-1, when a pair of Jamo is placed on each button and the syllable 1 button, the 2 sound strings, the 3 sound strings, and the vowel 1 stroke are selected, the syllable completion button is pressed in units of syllables. Applicable to When the user inputs "very", even if "troublesome" is output temporarily, it can be corrected to "very" by referring to the index at the end of the word (for example, entering a blank).

At this time, if the word index exists on both the client side and the server side, the client side first searches the index on the client side and attempts to identify the correct word. Can be identified.

To distinguish between units of words, as anyone can think of, can be identified by the elements that separate them. For example, you can think of spaces between spaces, between the beginning and the end of words, between the spaces and the end of inputs, between spaces and mode switching, and so on. Determining the correct word by referring to the index is performed on a word-by-word basis, so that an index reference can be made and the correct word can be determined when inputting an element that distinguishes words.

This can be applied to any case where ambiguity occurs by applying the iterative selection method. For example, ambiguity may occur if the consonants belong to the same button as the final and the first consonants in Samsung Electronics' method currently used in Korea. For example, "Country" <=> "Kuka". When entering codes by alphabet, the syllable (letter) units are entered without recognition, so in many cases, unconsciously entering "country" results in "guka". In this case, if it is not possible to know which of the two words is the target word even by the time delay or the like, the system (terminal or server) can find the target word by referring to the index. In this case, even though the finality "a" of "country" and the first "a" of "ga" are pressed in succession, in most cases the target word is "country", so the index is irrespective of time delay. A method of identifying a target word by referring to it may also be efficient.

In addition, it is obvious that this is applicable to all languages in which the repeated selection method is not limited to Korean. For example, in the English input or in the English mode of a different language keypad, the input of [2]-[2]-[2] is "AB" or "BA". If is registered in the index with the correct word, it can be recognized and provided to the target word to the user. If a plurality of words in which ambiguity occurs are registered in the index as correct words, a word with a high frequency of use may be provided to the user first, and the user may finally determine the target word.

If there is an ambiguity about the input of a word, if all the words corresponding to the input are recognized as correct words even when referring to the index, the user may be given feedback by appropriate means (visual and audio). .

The method of allowing the user to confirm the target word is to list a plurality of words that are recognized as correct words in the display window in order of frequency (or priority) and use the up / down scroll or the numeric buttons corresponding to the displayed order. To allow the user to determine the target word. Alternatively, select the control that displays only the most frequently used words and the next word if it is not the target word (called "next word control" for convenience) to display the next most frequently used words. If the target is not the target word, the user can continue to search for the target word by selecting the next word control again. In this case, the target word may be determined by inputting any other button (for example, inputting any button other than selection of the next word control such as selecting a different alphabet or a space or mode switching) after searching for the target word. .

The choice of the next word control can be applied to either the "partial full selection method" or the "repetitive selection method (standard / simple)" described in the earlier application. If the next word control is arranged at the position of the reference grid of a particular button, the next word control will be selected with that particular button.

6. How to use simple code and short input method / parallel input method

6.1 Alphabet Code

When accessing an information system using an information communication terminal, input of an alphabet is essential. Alternatively, the alphabet to be input can be entered by number coding. Miniaturized information communication terminals often adopt a keypad type interface. Here, the code refers to all kinds of codes, for example, telephone numbers, securities (listed company) codes, city codes, department codes, subway station codes, bank codes, etc., are innumerable. The advantage of encoding the various names is that input can be simplified.

The information communication terminal includes all types of information communication terminals, such as a personal computer, a mobile communication device, a smart phone, a PDA, a two-way text transmission and reception device, and an ATM. It also covers terminals without communication functions, such as electronic organizers. Information systems include all types of systems, including systems that can be accessed visually through the GUI, as well as systems that can only be accessed by sound, such as ARS. In addition, the system is narrowly referred to as a server-side system, and broadly also includes client software of a terminal compatible with the server system.

By using the alphabet placed on the keypad can be useful for memorizing various codes. In the memorization of the code, there may be a method by simple naming, initial naming, or full naming. The summary is as follows.

In simple naming, a code is used to specify a number associated with a word or phrase to be coded (collectively referred to as a word or phrase below). For example, in the case of Korean, in the case of the company name code, the code of "Gasan Electronics" is referred to as "1799" associated with a, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅈ as a simple code based on FIG. 4-2. In this case, by highlighting a, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅈ associated with the simple code "1799" in "Gasan Electronics", it is easier to know the simple code of a specific word. You can also extract it. In the case of simple naming, the code of a number of letters belonging to a word to be coded is defined as a code, and thus the code of "additional electron" is not necessarily "1799". For example, the simple code of "stock" can be a simple code of values associated with, ㅅ, ㅣ, ㄹ. It may be referred to as "1749" associated with a, σ, ㅓ, ㅈ, or "13294293" associated with the entire alphabet constituting the "additional electron". A simple code of a code associated with an entire alphabet constituting a phrase is referred to as " total association simple naming " In any case, simple naming (ie, simple code) can be thought of as specifying a code in association with an alphabet that makes up that phrase. The same can be applied to languages other than Korean. For example, in "captain", "2786" associated with the consonant "CPTN" may be a simple code, which is a partially related simple code, and for convenience, it is called "consonant related simple code" for convenience.

When a consonant association simple code is generated for a word beginning with vowel, such as "escape", it becomes "727" corresponding to "SCP", which is the same as the consonant association simple code of "scape". Therefore, in order to use the abbreviated simple code, it is possible to consider the simple code associated with the first vowel and the consonant in order to minimize the duplication of the defined simple code and the simple code corresponding phrase, and to add convenience in use. For convenience, it is named "First vowel + consonant simple code". Like the other simple codes, the first vowel + consonant related simple codes have the advantage of generating a simple code mechanically for a specific word.

Not only words but phrases can also be coded by simple naming. Using the letter "syllable" that best represents the meaning of the phrase "where to go" in the previous application, "8314" mapped to o, c, a, d can be a simple code. In the case of English, a simple code of "3886" associated with d, t, t, n, which has a phonetic value, for example, "date tonight" in the Election.

Initial naming is a special case of some associative simple naming. In the case of Korean, initial naming may have a method of specifying a number mapped to a consonant (first consonant) as a code based on a syllable (letter). This is referred to as "syllable-based initial naming" for convenience. In the case of "added electrons", the initial code by syllable-based initial naming becomes "1799" associated with the consonant and the consonant of each syllable (letter). Syllable-based initial naming can also be applied to languages other than Korean. For example, in English, the initial code by the syllable-based initial naming of the word "entertainment" may be "3886" associated with e, t, t, and m. Syllable-based initial naming can be more useful in the case of Korean where one syllable constitutes one letter. As well as Korean, it can be usefully used in other languages such as Chinese and Japanese where one syllable forms one letter. In Chinese, the syllable-based initial code of 北京 (Beijing: first to 'e' has a four-tone sign and last 'i' has a two-tone sign) is the “25” associated with b and j in Fig. 1-1. It becomes "14" on the basis of Figs. 10-1 to 10-4.

Similarly, initial naming is possible for a verse, where the initial code is "81" associated with the first alphabet of each word o, a in the phrase "Where to go" in the Election. In English, the initial code of the word-based initial naming for the phrase "dance with the wolf" given in the previous application is "3979" associated with d, w, t, and w. Word-based initial naming can be useful in any language to give code to the whole phrase.

For simplicity, we refer to simple codes (all-related simple codes) and initial codes (syllable initial codes, word-based initial codes) as "simple codes" (ie, broad codes) or "short codes" for convenience. . All related simple codes, consonant related simple codes, syllable based initial codes, and word based initial codes have regularity in the generation of their codes, so they can be used universally, and others have created simple codes based on such rules. Even if it is easy to use.

Full naming is the input value of a phrase to be coded by a specific character input method. Therefore, this may vary depending on the character input method applied, and it can be regarded as a code of a numerical value corresponding to a certain phrase in alphabetical units. In the case of "Seoul" as an example in the earlier application, the full code by the partial partial selection method (referred to in the earlier application) is "7745888944" based on Fig. 4-2. If the full code by the standard repetition selection method (mentioned in the earlier application) is "7448884". If the keypad is different from that of Fig. 4-2 or another alphabet input method is applied, there will be a full code value accordingly.

6.2 Traditional Chinese Character Input Method

In the Chinese input method, as in the method of inputting a Chinese character in Korean, it is common to input an English word corresponding to a Chinese pronunciation and to input a Chinese character when the Chinese character becomes a convertible Chinese character using the "Hanja conversion key". In other words, when entering the Chinese pinyin in Roman alphabet, the system searches for the corresponding Chinese characters and provides them to the user. See Figure 5-1. In Chinese, the full code can be determined based on the English pronunciation of Chinese.

6.3 Unique Simple Code                     

If the decoding of the simple code can be performed on the client side (that is, the client side has a specific phrase and a simple code value corresponding to the specific phrase), the phrase corresponding to the input simple code is transmitted to the server side. Can be. Even if the simple code can be decoded on the client side, if the simple code is required on the server side according to the characteristics of the application, the simple code itself (that is, a sequence of numbers) should be transmitted to the server side. Just do it. This means that simple code decryption can be done on the client side or on the server side.

When a simple code is defined and used for a plurality of phrases, a plurality of phrases corresponding to the same simple code may exist. The ambiguity that can occur between simple codes is called "second ambiguity" for convenience. In this case, inside the system, it is possible to create a unique code value by adding a serial number to a simple code having the same value, but the user mainly uses the simple code associated with a specific phrase, which causes secondary ambiguity. In such a case, it is natural that the system should be able to recommend such phrases to users according to their use priority. In the case of different phrases and the same simple code, the serial number may be used as a priority for recommending the user to the user by attaching the serial number to the simple code according to the priority of the phrase. Of course, it does not have to be serialized, and the system may have separate priority information.

For example, if the simple code of the "securities information" is equal to the syllable-based initial code "9196" and the simple code of the "sovereign information" is also equal to the syllable-based initial code "9196", You can give it a number and use that serial number as a priority to recommend to the user. If the frequency of use of "securities information" is high, the priority may be given to "securities information" = "91961", and "sovereign information" = "91962". Similarly, if the syllable-based initial codes of 先生 (xiansheng: vowel a) are equal to "97", the serial number is assigned according to the frequency of use of each word. Numbers can be used as priorities. If the frequency of use of xiansheng is higher than that of xuesheng, xiansheng = 971 and xuesheng = 972. The simple code generated by adding the serial number will be referred to as "unicode simple code" for convenience, and the simple code with redundancy without attaching the serial number is simply called "simple code" and encompasses both. "

In the example of xiansheng and xuesheng, if the user enters only "97", the system can provide xiansheng and xuesheng to the user, allow the user to double-select, If you recognized it from the beginning and entered "971", the system could recognize it as "先生 (xiansheng)".

Here, by displaying the "x, s" used as the basis of the syllable-based initial code, it is possible to give a better visual effect to the user.One of the methods to display the highlight is capitalized like XianSheng. Furthermore, the system may interpret the simple code “97” from words capitalized like this.

6.4 Examples of Simple Codes

The following is an example of assigning a simple code (syllable standard initial code) to a city name. This can be useful in railway information systems.

. Seoul = 78, Suwon = 78, Daejeon = 39, Sintanjin = 739,. . .

Since the initial syllable standard codes of Seoul and Suwon are the same, in order to avoid this in the system, simple codes can be uniqueized such as "Seoul = 781" and "Suwon = 782". If the user sends only "78" to the system, the system will give the appropriate feedback (eg, provide a list of Seoul and Suwon or speak it by voice) and let the user choose between Seoul and Suwon. If the user recognized this from the beginning and entered "781", the system could recognize it as "Seoul."

If the server-side system does not require the simple code "78" but needs the word "Seoul" itself, the client side interprets the simple code "78" and transmits "Seoul" to the server side. Alternatively, even if the simple code can be interpreted on the client side, if the server requires the simple code itself according to the characteristics of the application, the input simple code itself may be sent to the server side.

Another example of assigning a simple code (all-related simple code, syllable-based initial code, consonant-related simple code, first vowel + consonant-related simple code) to a city name, based on Fig. 1-1, 北京 (Beijing) The syllable-based initial code of becomes "25" associated with b and j, the total associated simple code becomes "2345464", and the consonant associated simple code becomes "2564" associated with b, j, n, g.

Here are some examples of securities stocks (listed companies): This can be useful in various securities information systems.

. Donghwa Pharmaceutical = 3098, Digital Shipbuilding = 39397, Handong Freetel = 83643,. . .

For example, in the case of "Digital Chosun", it is possible to give a visually better effect to the user by highlighting and displaying "c, r, r, r, r" used as the basis of syllable-based initial codes.

An example of a bank code is as follows: This can be useful in ATMs and various financial information systems.

. National (Bank) = 14, Hana (Bank) = 82,. . .

Here, it is obvious that the user can utilize the simple code so that the user can input the phrase by interpreting and displaying it to the user. This is called a "shortcut input method", and will be described in detail together with a "parallel input method" next.

6.5 Automatic reassignment of priorities based on frequency of selection

Furthermore, if the priorities of "Securities Information" and "Sovereign Information" were first and second, respectively, but the number of times a particular user selects "Sovereign Information" is significant, It may be adjusted to be higher than the priority of "securities information". There are various ways as described, but you can achieve this by changing the serial number. If the system has priority information separately, it is possible to change the priority information.

The criteria for determining whether the number of times to select "sovereignty information" is remarkably large may be determined by the system or may be (re) designated by the user. For example, if the selection criteria is different from a predetermined priority at least 8 times out of 10, the existing priority may be automatically corrected. Depending on the option, the user may be asked to confirm the correction.

The same can be applied to other languages, and the same can be said for the case where “sovereign information” and “securities information” are replaced with “xiansheng” and “xuesheng” respectively.

6.6 Automatic designation of simple code and incidence of simple code

In particular, consonant-related simple codes, syllable-based initial codes, and word-based initial codes, in addition to all-related simple codes, have regularities in generating simple codes as described above. If you enter a specific phrase in the specified state, the corresponding simple code can be automatically extracted and stored in the system. In addition, by displaying the alphabet associated with the simple code, it is possible to increase the ease of use. In the case of English, the alphabet associated with the simple code is highlighted and displayed.

In addition, the earlier application proposed "shortening input method" and "shortening / pool parallel input method". The simple code for the shortcut input can be defined in the system, the user can change it, and the user can specify the simple code for the new phrase.

In deciding simple codes for new phrases, simple code generation rules such as totally related simple code, partially related simple code, consonant related simple code, syllable based initial code, and word based initial code can be used. For example, if a user wants to use the word-based initial code as a simple code in generating a simple code for "dance with the wolf," enter "dance with the wolf" in the simple code generation mode. Enter the word-based initial code "3983". Similarly, in generating the simple code for the "securities information", if you want to use the syllable-based initial code as the simple code, in the simple code generation mode, enter "securities information", and enter "9196".

However, if the user designates a simple code for a specific phrase, the simple code can be stored in the system and the phrase to be generated is entered. Can be assigned automatically. In the above example, the syllable-based initial code is set in the system, and by inputting only "securities information", the simple code for "securities information" can be automatically designated as "9196". Similarly, the syllable-based initial code can be set in the system, and by entering xiansheng, the simple code for xiansheng can be automatically assigned as "97".

In the case of English, capital letters can be used to highlight and display the alphabet to be used as a simple code. Therefore, the simple code designation method can be specified in advance by using an uppercase letter as the simple code, and when a "DaTe ToNignt" input is made, "3886" corresponding to the uppercase letter "DTTN" is automatically designated as the simple code or "ToNignt ShoW". Upon input, "8679" corresponding to the uppercase "TNSW" can be automatically designated as a simple code.

6.7 Shortcut Input Method and Parallel Input Method of Phrase Using Simple Code

When a simple code (initial code is a special case of the simple code, it is included in the simple code unless otherwise specified) is recognized as a phrase corresponding to the simple code by the system (client side system or server side system). It is possible to process. Therefore, if a phrase corresponding to a specific simple code is recognized and shown to the user, it can be used to input a word.

In fact, in the foreign alphabet input method, an index assigned to the word "all associated simple codes" is stored in the terminal (client side system), and the user shows the corresponding words according to the priority of each word when the user enters the code and the target word. The character input system is implemented by allowing to determine. You can find two Internet sites at http://www.tegic.com and http://www.zicorp.com. Such a method will be referred to as " whole associated shortened input method " or " foreign method " in the present invention for convenience. Or, since the typical input system using this approach is Tegic's “T9”, it will be called “T9LIM: T9 Like Input Method”. Figure 5-2 shows an example of input from the T9 system of Tegic. As shown in Fig. 5-2, in order to input meet, the user inputs 622. "," The system initially gives "off" to the user, but when "6228" is entered, "meet" is displayed.

Comparing Tegic's and Zi's method with the alphabet input method on the keypad proposed by the applicant, the applicant's alphabet input method gives a unique code in alphabetical units and inputs a target alphabet or target phrase by full code. In the foreign method mentioned above, the whole associated simple code is given in word units, and the target word can be input by the simple code.

The disadvantage of the foreign method is that it is possible to input only a predefined word by assigning a code in word units, and to use a toggle button or a move button to input a word that is not frequently used in case of different words with the same code. By selecting and confirming words, input is not easy, words that are not target words may appear temporarily at the time of input, occupy a large amount of storage capacity of the system and are expensive to implement.

Here, it is pointed out that a simple code (some association or all association) is given to a commercial phrase (a concept including both a commercial word or a common phrase) and a target phrase can be input using the simple code. The simple code for the common phrase can be defined in the system and provided to the user, and the user must be able to specify it arbitrarily. Alternatively, the user should be able to modify the simple code predefined in the system. What the user can specify randomly has the advantage that the user can easily know the simple code value for a particular common phrase.

In the present invention, a method of inputting a target phrase using a simple code (including partially associated simple code, all associated simple code, and initial code) is called a "shortened input method" for convenience, and a method of inputting a target alphabet by a full code. For convenience, it is called "full input method" in preparation for a short input method. In addition, as described below, the shortcut input method and the pool input method can be applied in parallel, and the method of applying the shortcut input method and the pool input method in parallel can be simply referred to as "short / full parallel input method" or simply "parallel." Input method ".

The ambiguity generated by using the iterative selection method among the full input methods that assign a unique code in alphabetical units and input the code is called "primary ambiguity" or "alphabetic ambiguity" for convenience. Shall be. On the other hand, in the way of assigning codes to all words and inputting target words through this code, as in foreign methods, there are ambiguities in which different words exist for the same code. We will call it "ambiguity" or "phrase ambiguity". In the present invention, simply ambiguity means primary ambiguity.

If a simple code is first interpreted as a simple code (i.e., a short input method is first applied or a short input mode is used as a basic input mode), and there is no simple code corresponding to the input value, the second code is a full code. It is possible to construct a scenario such as recognizing (i.e., applying the full input method secondarily), and conversely, checking whether the full code is formed first on the input value (that is, applying the full input method first or the basic input mode). If a full code is not formed, a simple code can be recognized as a simple code (that is, a secondary input method is applied secondarily). The first interpretation of the input value as a simple code can be regarded as the application of "shortened input mode" as the basic input mode, and the first interpretation as "full input mode" as the basic input mode. It can be seen to apply. It is desirable that users who use commercial phrases mainly in text input should apply the shortcut input method (that is, use the shortcut input mode as the basic input mode), and if not, the full input method is applied first. That is, it is preferable to use the full input mode as the basic input mode.

In this case, when the basic input mode is set to the full input mode, the input value is first interpreted as a full code. Therefore, even if a simple code is input, the input value can form a full code. A word other than the target word may be input. For example, in the case of applying the standard repetition selection method as the full input method in FIG. 4-2, the simple code of the word "corn" is set to "877" (using syllable-based initial code), and the input is primarily performed. Since it is considered full code, it can be recognized as "F". This is when the corn of the second and third letters correspond to the same button, such as "corn", "corn", "inexhaustible", "war", "excellent", "waste window", "woodangtang", and the like. On the contrary, when the short input mode is set as the basic input mode, the input value is primarily interpreted as a simple code, and thus, even when the full code is input, it may be recognized as a word other than the target word. In other words, this is the ambiguity between the simple code and the full code, which is called "third ambiguity" for convenience.

This third order ambiguity can be overcome by a toggle method or a method of selecting from a list similarly to the existing method. Alternatively, another method may be used to switch from the full input mode to the short input mode or the short input mode to the full input mode in word units before inputting an ambiguity. It is possible to enter one word in katakana in hiragana mode, or one word in hiragana mode in hiragana mode, by selecting the word hiragana / katagana conversion control by selecting "a / a" control as suggested in the applicant's application. It is similar to that. For example, if the default input mode is the full input mode, the system recognizes it as a simple code from the beginning and inputs the index by referring to the index. The target word can be provided to the user. In the case of using the shortcut input mode as the basic input mode, the input value input after selecting the "short / full" control can be recognized and processed as a full code from the beginning. The "short / full" control may likewise be pre-input or post-input to the target word, but in this case it would be convenient to pre-input.

The determination of whether the input value is a full code or a simple code when the parallel input method is applied may be made in units of words as referring to an index in order to remove the first ambiguity. It may be determined whether it is a simple code.

When the full input method is set as the default mode and the parallel input method is applied, the input value is judged as a simple code at a time when it is determined that the full code is not formed by checking whether the input value forms a full code every time one code is input. Therefore, the efficiency of the parallel input method can be doubled by showing the user a phrase corresponding to the simple code index. Similarly, when the parallel input method is applied to the short-term input method as the default mode, the entire input method is set at the moment of comparing the input value and the index every time a code is input and confirms that there is no word that matches the input value in the index. It can be determined by the full code of. This means that the third order ambiguity that occurs in the middle of the input can be removed at the beginning of the input by applying the rules of each full input method. This also applies to the case of using the alphabet input method which is not presented in the previous application as the full input method. For example, based on the pool input method (standard repeat selection method, partial partial selection method) presented in the previous application,                     

In the case of Korean, for example, when the standard repetition selection method is applied based on Fig. 4-2 as a full input method, the second input value and the third input value of all syllables by the full code must always have the same value. If this condition is violated, the input value can be determined as a simple code and processed. In the case where the consonant is allowed to be processed as a combination of basic consonants, the judgment criteria may be applied accordingly. This is applicable in all cases where the standard repetition method is applied.

Also, in all languages, when the partial full selection method is applied as the full input method, two input values correspond to one alphabet, and the second input value is limited to the first input value among the two input values. . For example, in the case of English, when only left and right linear combinations are used as shown in FIG. ) Is used as the first input value corresponding to one alphabet, the value that can come as the second input value is also the button ([1], [2], [3]) on the first row. Similarly, if the second row of buttons ([4], [5], [6]) is entered after [2] + [1] is entered, the next value to form the full code is also the second row. It is one of the buttons [4], [5], and [6]. As soon as the input value violates this, the system considers the input value as a simple code and can recommend the word corresponding to the simple code to the user according to the priority. For example, in the parallel input method in which the full partial selection method is the full input method and the full input method is the basic input mode, as shown in FIG. 5-3, when the user inputs 4357, the simple code of “help” is 2nd. As soon as input value 3 is input, the system recognizes that the input value does not form a full code, and treats the input value as a simple code.

If the partial partial selection method is applied to Fig. 4-2, the next button that can come to the input of the first [1] button to form a full code is the [1] or [2] button. In case of breaching this, it is determined that the input value is a simple code rather than a full code, and the target word corresponding to the input value can be recommended to the user according to the priority by referring to the index. When four alphabets of P, Q, R, and S are assigned to the [7] button as shown in Figs. 1-3, one of the four alphabets, as pointed out in the earlier application, will be arranged on a grid forming a vertical combination. In this case, when the [7] button is input to form a full code for one alphabet, the next button is the third row of buttons ([7], [8], [9]) or up and down. Only the adjacent combination's button ([4] button) can come, so if it violates it, the input value can be treated as a simple code. This is applicable for all languages when the partial partial selection method set out in the earlier application is applied.

For example, while the simple code of Beijing (Beijing) is stored as the syllable-based initial code in the simple code index based on Fig. 1-1, “25” is used as the full input method. With the full input mode as the default input mode, when the user inputs “25”, the system enters the full code as soon as [5] is entered after [2] is entered for the first time (from the beginning of the word). Recognizes something that cannot be achieved (since [2] is one of [1], [2], and [3]), and refers to the simple code index. The corresponding “北京” can be provided to the user. In the case of Chinese, a Chinese character (漢字, 北京) can be provided to the user in a phrase corresponding to the simple code “25” exemplarily illustrated (since the kanji “北京” is a target word). For languages that use non-Chinese phonetic characters, the system will provide the user with a “Beijing” corresponding to the simple code “25”. If there are several phrases corresponding to the simple code “25”, the user can select a phrase desired by providing a list or repeatedly pressing a specific button (by a toggle method). Please note.

After all, applying the parallel input method as shown in Fig. 5-4 registers a simple code for a frequently used word such as “北京 (Beijing)” in the index, and performs a general full input method and a short input without performing a mode change. When you enter a word registered with a simple code, you can enter it with fewer strokes.

In the case of Fig. 4-5, since only one basic consonant is assigned to each button, when a syllable-based initial code that can be used universally in Korean is used as a simple code, even when a short input method and a full input method are applied in parallel, 3 There is a good feature that allows input without car ambiguity. In other words, if the user inputs the syllable-based initial code when the parallel input method is applied, the input value cannot form the full code from the second input (when the sound and the sound are input by the control processing method). By searching, you can recommend the appropriate words to users based on their priorities. The same is true for full code input.

As an example above, it is one of the "cores" of the present invention that it is possible to determine whether the input value is a simple code or a full code in the middle of the input when the parallel input method is applied. This applies not only to the case of using the pool input method proposed by the applicant, but also to the case of using another pool input method. As an example, there is a method of inputting an alphabet by combining a first button to which each alphabet is assigned and a second button corresponding to the ranking of the alphabet in the first button. In other words, P = [7] + [1] in Figure 1-1. In this case, since the second button becomes one of the [1], [2], and [3] buttons in Fig. 1-1, the system treats the input value as a simple code at the moment when the input value violates this rule. You can do it. In particular, the full input method proposed by the applicant has a good characteristic that it is easy to know whether the input value is full code when the parallel input method is applied as in the above example.

Also, as mentioned in the applicant's earlier application, the interpretation of the simple code or full code may occur on the client side or on the server side. And in looking up the index to overcome the primary ambiguity (alphabetic ambiguity) in the previous application, it is necessary to interpret the simple code or full code in the scenario of referencing the client side index first and the server side index second. Also applicable. Conversely, it is possible to refer to the server-side index primarily, and to refer to the client-side index second. Furthermore, the input value is first interpreted as a simple code, but the client side index is first referred to, the server side index is secondary, and if the simple code for the input value cannot be retrieved, it is interpreted as full code again. However, if the client side analyzes first and the client side does not have such an analysis function, it is possible to analyze secondarily on the server side. As another example, the input value may be interpreted as a simple code primarily, but may be provided to the user by referring to both the client-side index and the server-side index, and the user may select the target word. Similar modifications are possible in applying the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the analysis location (client side, server side). In other words, various combinations are possible in the application of the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the analysis location (client side, server side). That is, in the order of (A)-(B)-(C)-(D) or (A)-(C)-(B)-(D) in FIG. ), (B), (C), (D) means that it can be applied in the order by all the various combinations.

The advantages of applying the short input method and the full input method in parallel are as follows. First, the full input method can be used, so the user can input all words even if they do not exist in the dictionary other than the predefined words. / All association), and the number of input strokes can be greatly reduced by specifying a partial association simple code. And there is an advantage that can be given a word-based initial code not only for words but also for phrases. However, the foreign method uses a word-based index for all word inputs, so the total associated simple code has to be used to minimize the case where the same code is assigned to different words.

In addition, the system must have an "index" that contains a specific phrase and code value for that phrase, which requires much less storage than a foreign method that has an "index" for every word. Shall be. And this "index" must have in the system either a "index" for the correct word or a "index" for the wrong word in order for the ambiguity to occur, in order to eliminate ambiguity. Can be used as

In every language, the phonetic consonant has a phonetic consonant, so the technique of extracting consonants and making abbreviations has been widely used. In the case of English, for example, in the military term "captain", the consonant "CPT" which has a phonetic value is extracted and used as an abbreviation, "PVT" in "private", and "SGT" in "sergent". Is used as an abbreviation, "staff sergent" is used as an abbreviation "SSG", "sergent first class" is used as an abbreviation, and so on. Of course, the "captain" and "private" is composed of two syllables, respectively, but the consonants extracted from the abbreviation can be regarded as consonants representing each syllable. Thus, in the case of "captain", "278" associated with "CPT" can be specified as a simple code.

As described above, being able to apply a shortened input method by arbitrarily designating a partial association simple code for a common phrase based on syllables has a significant meaning in addition to reducing input effort. Phonetically, syllables are defined as "psychological entities." It is also consonant to have a note in a syllable. If only the collection "AAI" is extracted from the example captain, it is almost impossible to infer the captain. However, extracting the consonant "CPTN" or "CPT" makes it easy to infer the captain. In some sentences in English, if you remove the vowel for each word and list only the consonants, you can usually infer the original sentence. In other words, the use of the partial association simple code in association with each consonant that constitutes the syllable means that the user can naturally adapt to the short input method and can be convenient for the user.

In particular, in English, the use of abbreviations is common, and in the case of listed companies, a certain number of abbreviations are designated, so a simple code can be utilized based on this abbreviation.

To allow a user to specify a simple code (partial association or total association) for a particular phrase, there is an advantage in that it is easy to remember a code value for a common phrase. Furthermore, if a user requires only a few phrases (for example, use less than 10 phrases), they do not assign codes associated with the alphabet of the phrases, but only 1 for each phrase. , 2, 3,. . . You can also assign a simple code.

6.8 Grouping Simple Codes / Phrasebooks and Specifying Search Ranges

If you specify a simple code for a large number of phrases, there is a possibility that a lot of redundancy may occur. By grouping the phrases corresponding to the simple code, the simple code is searched only for a specific group of phrases. Can be reduced. A phrase does not necessarily belong to one group, but may belong to several groups.                     

For example, the names of listed companies, city names, commercial phrases, ... The grouping of common phrases can be grouped in a tree form by subgroups such as social, political, ... In this example, the tree-type grouping in two steps is presented, but the tree-type grouping is possible in three, four, or more steps. See Figures 5-6. If the user (or the system) restricts the simple code search range to the listed company name group, the system searches for the named phrase corresponding to the simple code entered only in the category of the listed company name group. Can reduce ambiguity. Similarly, if the search range is a commercial phrase, it can be a search range including all sub-groups below the common phrase group. If a social field group is designated as a search range among common phrase groups, only the group including the social field or less (in a tree-type group structure) will be search range.

The tree-like group in Figs. 5-6 can be thought of as a folder in the Windows Explorer. The search range can also be automatically redirected by the system. For example, if a hierarchy of administrative districts is stored as a subgroup of city names, and after the user selects a particular city, the search range for the next input will naturally be the name of the sub-administrative unit of the specific city. will be. For example, after the user selects "Seoul" in the city, the next choice would be "gu" in Seoul, and once the user selects "Yangcheon-gu", the next choice would be "dong" in Yangcheon-gu. It will be.

6.9 Use of a relay server                     

The simple code can be interpreted on the client side or on the server side, and the phrase corresponding to the simple code is provided to the client side or another server side in charge of decoding the simple code (including the full code in some cases). You can put a relay server that does. See FIG. 6-1. In addition, in FIG. 6-1, if the client side decodes the simple code primarily and does not interpret the phrase corresponding to the input simple code, the phrase corresponding to the simple code input from the relay server is secondarily analyzed and the analysis fails. In turn, it is possible to interpret the phrase corresponding to the simple code input from each server in a third order. The third simple code decryption server (hereinafter referred to as "third server") is a server equipped with an application using an input simple code or a phrase corresponding to the simple code.

If a relay server is provided, even if the tertiary server needs a phrase other than the simple code, the user can enter the simple code and the relay server does not store the simple code and the phrase corresponding to the simple code. It is possible for the relay server to interpret the simple code input from the user and deliver the phrase corresponding to the simple code to the tertiary server.

Each time a code value of a simple code is input, the phrase corresponding to the simple code is searched for the index stored and the feedback is given to the client side or each server side, or the word unit may be provided.

6.10 Word Division

In the present invention, the word unit means from the beginning of the word to the end of the word. This can be identified by the combination of words and all elements that can differentiate words (word start, space, mode switch, enter,…). For example, a space, a space, a space, a mode switch, etc. may identify that a word is input through a word start to a word end. Word-by-word feedback can be fully implemented in any language that supports the current network environment.

6.11 Downloading simple codes / correspondence phrases

Furthermore, a simple code on the server side and a phrase corresponding to the simple code can be downloaded to the client side without the user directly inputting and storing the phrase.

The downloading unit may be downloaded in a single phrase unit, or may be downloaded in a group unit (group of tree structure) of the above-mentioned phrases. If you select the upper group, you can download the lower group. It can be downloaded while maintaining the tree structure of the server-side phrase group, or it can be downloaded as a group designated by the user on the client side. If there is a relay server whose main function is decoding of simple code, the relay server may be in charge of this function.

7. Entering Symbols

As presented in the previous application, it has been explained that it is possible to arrange the national language alphabet in "order close to the reference grid", and then to place numbers and English alphabets. It has been explained that alphabets and numbers can be selected. Likewise, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the national language alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also a number and an English alphabet can be input through the subsequent control processing method.

The present invention further provides a method (ie, by means of a hidden control processing method) that can be efficiently input without displaying various symbols and the like, which were displayed and inputted on a keypad in an earlier application. do.

In other words, the symbol control is placed in the appropriate grid among the grids in which the controls are arranged in the previous application, and a symbol is inputted by combining a symbol control with a button (a button other than a control button) that can mean a symbol. Here, for example, a button that can mean a symbol is a [5] button because a period can be easily associated with "ㅁ" in the period.

For example, in the Korean embodiment (FIG. 4-2) of the invention of the prior application, the symbol control may be placed at the position of the grid which can be selected by pressing the [*] button twice consecutively. In other words, a (representative alphabet), ㅋ (2nd), symbol (3rd), ... such as the relationship between the representative alphabet and the alphabet. For control pre-input, when entering "period", ㅁ = {Symbol} + ㅁ = [*] + [*] + [5]. When input after control, ㅁ = ㅁ + {Symbol} = [5] + [*] + [*]. If the symbol control is placed at the position of the grid selectable by pressing the [*] button three times, the input of the [*] button is added one by one in the example.                     

If only one symbol control is provided, only about ten symbols can be input even if one symbol means is given to each of the ten numeric buttons. For example, the meaning of the symbol is given to each button as follows.

[1] button:? The meaning of the word ("ㄱ" is placed, similar in shape to?)

[2] button:! Meaning ("ㄴ" is placed, the same as the first letter of "exclamation mark")

[3] button: The meaning of $ (the word "ㄷ" is placed, the same as the first letter of "dollar")

[4] button:. . .

[5] button:. Meaning ("ㅁ" is placed, the same as the first letter of the "period")

[6] button: Meaning of * ("ㅂ" is placed, same as first letter of "asterisk")

[7] button: The meaning of, ("ㅅ" is placed, same as the first letter of "comma")

[8] button: meaning of "(" ㅇ "is placed, same as the first letter of" quotation code ")

[9] button: The meaning of ~ (the collection "ㅡ" is arranged and looks similar to ~)

[0] button: Meaning of @ (number 0 is placed and looks like @)

As described above, a symbol can be input by combining a button and a symbol control that can be associated with various symbols. The meanings of the symbols on each button are as follows: the association between the national name / shape of the symbol and the placed alphabet, or the relationship between the English name / shape and the placed English alphabet, and the assigned numeric name / shape. The meaning of the symbol can be given by considering the relation of This may not be the same as it may vary depending on the taste of the individual, and may also allow the individual to (re) set the meaning of the symbol for each button.

Through this, a frequently used symbol can be treated as if it is a subsequent alphabet belonging to a number button that is easily associated with an example. In the above example, the question mark is associated with the [1] button with the "a" placed in consideration of the similarity of the shape, because the period that is used more frequently than the question mark starts with "ㅁ".

Similarly, in assigning meanings to symbols for each button, an English name / shape or a numeric name / shape can be used. The example below can be used interchangeably with the national language.

[1] button:? Meaning (with the letter "q" placed in the first letter of "Question mark")

[2] button: The meaning of, ("c" is placed, same as the first letter of "Comma")

[3] button:. Meaning ("d" is placed, the same as the first letter of "Dot")

[4] button:! Meaning ("i" is placed and looks like "!")

[5] button:. . .

[6] button:. . .

[7] button: Meaning of / ("s" is arranged but same as first letter of "Slash")

[8] button:: Meaning (the number "8" is placed: and looks similar to)

[9] button:! Meaning ("x" is placed and associated with "eXclamation mark")                     

[0] button: Meaning of @ (number 0 is placed and looks like @)

The meaning of symbols based on the English language can be usefully used even in non-English speaking languages using keypads marked with mixed English. In addition, setting colons with similarities in the shape of the number 8 also has the advantage that they can be used universally regardless of language. Similarly, comma may be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [9] button with similarity to the number 9, but not in the above example.

The symbol control can be set to the appropriate button. In English, if you do not place any other control on the [*] button in Figure 1-1, select the symbol control with the [*] button 1 (i.e., place the symbol control at the position of the [*] button reference grid). You may. In the case of European languages with a modified alphabet with subscripts, the symbol control can be placed at the reference grid of the [0] or [#] button. However, if you put the symbol control on the [0] button, it is better not to give the meaning of the "@" symbol as in the example above.

If the symbol control is placed on the [*] button and the control input is applied, when colon (:) is input in Fig. 1-1 in English, as follows: = [8] + {symbol} = [8] + [*] do.

As shown in the example above, if you assign one symbol to each button and assign the symbol control to only one grid of the control button, you can enter only about 10 symbols. In addition, in order to give meaning to each button, as in the example of English, the button assigned "s" may be assigned meanings such as slash, semi-colon, period, but only one of them is given the meaning of slash. Since the meaning of the dot is also assigned to the button assigned to "d", the exclamation mark inevitably takes into account the similarity of the shape, so that the button assigned to "i" is assigned to "!". Given meaning.

Therefore, a large number of symbol controls (eg, symbol control 1, symbol control 2,...) Can be selected to control the number of symbols can be input through the control processing method. For example, assign a dot meaning to a button assigned a "d" (or a "period" to a button assigned a "ㅁ"), and treat a comma of similar shape as if it were a subsequent alphabet of the dot. can do.

For example, a symbol input associated with a button to which a basic consonant with lattice or hard consonants is assigned may be “dot (.) = 3 ****”. Since “3 *** = large”, the [*] button can be used to enter the symbol promised 4 times. After entering in dot (.) Like “comma (,) = 3 *****”, it is possible to input by pressing the [*] button once more, which means that the Korean syllable does not start with the vowel “ㅡ”. It is used. The input of comma (,) can be understood in terms of chained subsequent control processing.

If no sound is to be input by the control method (ie no sound control), it is natural that "symbol control 1" is selected for [2] button 2 (skip control processing). Similarly colons and semi-colon of similar shape can be regarded as subsequent alphabets assigned to the same button and entered by the control method. The same applies to other symbols.

Even when two symbol controls are used as "Symbol Control 1" and "Symbol Control 2", the meaning of the symbols should be given to each button and remembered, and there is a limit to the number of symbols that can be input. do. Therefore, you can enter more symbols by grouping symbols with the same tricks as dot and comma, grouping colon and semi-colon, and having multiple symbol controls.

It is also desirable to group the symbols so as to be convenient for the user. In the present invention, examples of symbol groupings that can be generally used are shown. First, the deformation form of the dot may be set as a group based on the shape of various symbols. For example, dot (.), Comma (,), colon (:), semi-colon (;), quotation mark ("), .., question mark (?), Exclamation mark (!),. It is possible to group them together in the form of dot, that is, "0-dimensional" symbols, where? And! Are both 0- and 1-dimensional, so 0-dimensional (dot) In terms of subgroup ranking, the frequency of use may be taken into account, as mentioned in the earlier filing, but it may be better to allow the user to set it. When the number of symbols is large, it may be convenient to input the symbol control afterwards. In the terminal with the display window, it can be seen that the symbol changes as the control button is pressed.

The association of the grouped dot (0-dimensional) symbols to a particular button can also be set for the user's convenience. For example, if you can represent a group and the most commonly used symbol is dot, it can be considered as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [3] button containing the dot's "d". In the example of Fig. 7-1 in which the symbol control is added to Fig. 1-1, the symbol control button is set to the [*] button, and after the control is applied, dot = [3] + [*], comma = [3]. + [*] + [*], colon = [3] + [*] + [*] + [*], semi-colon = [3] + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*] ,. . . Becomes Or, if it is a 0-dimensional form and is considered to be a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [0] button, it will be combined with the [0] button rather than the [3] button. Or, the dot form is the most basic form, so it can be considered as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [1] button.

Next, you can group the symbols in the form of lines, that is, "one-dimensional" into groups. For example, slash (/), hat symbol (^), question mark (?), Exclamation mark (!), Parentheses 1 ((), parentheses 2 ()), angle brackets 1 (<), angle brackets 2 (>), square brackets 1 ([), square brackets 2 (]), tilde (~), minus (-), arrow1 (<-), arrow2 (->),. . . Can be grouped as such. Also, as described in the earlier application, sub-orders may be assigned in consideration of the frequency of use, and associating this with a subsequent alphabet of a specific button may set an appropriate button as described above. For example, it is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [1] button or as a subsequent alphabet of the [5] button in which the letter “l” is placed.

Then, the combination of lines, that is, "two-dimensional" forms, can be grouped into groups. For example, at (@), ampersent (&), asterisk (*), sharp (#), dollar ($), won symbol (W + =), yen symbol (¥),. . . , heart1 (♡), heart2 (♥), clover 1 (♧), white triangular 1 (◁), white triangular 2 (▷), white triangular 3 (∇),. . . , Black triangle 1 (◀),. . You can group like., ☏, ☎, ☜, ♨ and so on. Again, sub-orders can be considered in terms of their frequency of use, and associating with a particular button can be done with the appropriate method. However, it is necessary to associate it with a button other than the button which associates the symbol of 0-dimensional form and the symbol of 1-dimensional form before.

When grouping symbols into three groups of 0D, 1D, and 2D forms (called "three groups" for convenience) as above, it is advantageous to remember only three related numeric buttons, but they are not frequently used. When entering a symbol, there is a disadvantage of pressing the control button several times. Thus, if you show an example of subdividing the group further (called "detailed group" for convenience),

First, two-dimensional symbol groups are divided into symbol groups (eg *, #,%, ...) that form a combination of lines and symbol groups (eg ◁, ◀, ...) that form a single closed curve. Can be. In addition, in the group, symbols that form a figure such as ☏, ☎, ☜, ☞, ♨, ... can be placed in separate groups. You can also place it in a subsequent alphabet that belongs to the appropriate button. If these groups are to be set apart, these symbols may or may not be excluded from the preceding symbol group, as are other cases.                     

Next, one- or two-dimensional symbols are used in mathematical expressions: +,-, *, /, root (√), sigma (∑), integral (∫),. . . Etc. may be placed in a separate group. You can also place it in a subsequent alphabet that belongs to the appropriate button.

Also symbols that can indicate directions: →, ←, ↑, ↓, ↗, ↙, ↖, ↘, ◁, ▷, ◀,. . . Can be divided into groups. You can also consider subsequent alphabets in conjunction with the appropriate buttons.

And a variety of parentheses that can form another group relatively reasonably: (,), [,], {,}, <,>,. . . Can be placed in another group. Also, in grouping in the form of parentheses, the left parenthesis and the right parenthesis may be grouped respectively.

In the case of not having only three major groups and allowing subgroups to be entered by them, they said that the alphabet belonging to the detailed group may or may not be left in the three major groups. Will have to put on.

By applying the above symbol grouping to Fig. 1-1, an example of considering each group of symbols as a subsequent alphabet of a specific button is as follows. The symbol group in the 0-dimensional form is regarded as a follow-up alphabet belonging to the [0] button, the symbol group in the 1-dimensional form is considered to be a follow-up alphabet belonging to the [1] button, and the symbol group in the 2-dimensional form is included in the [2] button. A symbol group in the form of a single closed curve among two-dimensional symbol groups is regarded as an alphabet belonging to the [8] button. Regarding the alphabet, the mathematical symbol group is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [6] button, the directional symbol group is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [3] button, and the parentheses symbol group is a subsequent alphabet belonging to any of the remaining numeric buttons. Can be regarded as. As described above, this is only one example of associating a symbol group with each button, and may be set for convenience of the user.

In summary, the symbol can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to a specific button, and can be grouped into three groups (0, 1, and 2 dimensions) in the control process, or further divided into 10 or less groups. It is one of the essences of the present invention that the grouping can be used to input almost any symbol. In addition, each group of symbols is regarded as a follow-up alphabet belonging to a specific button, and it is treated as a follow-up alphabet belonging to a button associated with a group of symbols by name, dimension, shape, etc., so that the symbols are not displayed on the keypad. It is one of the cores of the present invention to be able to use a "hidden follow-up control method" while maintaining the alphabetical arrangement.

In the present application, the [*] button or any one of the up and down buttons is mainly used as a control button for a symbol, and the [#] button can be used as a subsequent control button for numbers and English alphabets. For example, if the [#] button is already used as a subsequent control button, then additional controls for numbers and English alphabets can be placed on the available grid on the [#] button. In this case too, in the selection of the control, as mentioned above, the control that cannot be combined with the representative alphabet can be skipped so that the next available control is selected.

8. How to use the move button

8.1 Use of control buttons as control buttons

According to the earlier application, control buttons in which various controls are arranged may be placed on any button in the 4 * 3 keypad, or may be placed on a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. In the first application, especially in languages with a large number of alphabets and a large number of modified alphabets, you may have experienced a lack of buttons for use as control buttons in a 4 * 3 keypad. In the present invention, it is pointed out that the primary function of the left / up / down movement button which is not used relatively frequently in the text input mode can be used as a control button mentioned in the present application and the present invention and shows such an example. In other words, in the character input mode, a separate button outside the 4 * 3 keypad is used as a control button, and the up / down / left movement buttons are used as the control button.

8-1 shows a button of a clamshell terminal which is typically used at present. The dashed [i] button is for accessing the Internet. This button may or may not be present depending on the terminal. In this case, the right shift button is used for blank input, and in Korean, it is also used as a syllable (letter) confirmation button for removing the first ambiguity. In the menu selection mode other than the text input mode, the up / down / left navigation buttons are useful as a navigation button for selecting a menu. However, in the character input mode, the up / down / left movement buttons are not frequently used, and the up / down movement buttons are not frequently used. For convenience, the up / down / left navigation buttons are combined to be referred to as “up and down navigation buttons” or “up and down left buttons”, and the up / down navigation buttons are referred to as “up and down navigation buttons” or “up and down buttons”. The same trick applies when referring to only one movement button in either direction.

8.2 Arrange bottom button

First, the up, down, left and right buttons are usually placed above the number buttons. However, to use the primary functions of these buttons as buttons for various alphabet input in the character input mode, it is useful to be placed at the bottom of the 4 * 3 keypad along with the [*] and [#] buttons which are mainly used as control buttons. It can be seen. 8-2 and 8-3 illustrate this. However, this is not necessarily required. For convenience, the example of the present invention will be described as an example in which a move button is disposed below the 4 * 3 keypad.

Here, it can be seen that the 5 * 3 keypad can be configured by combining the 4 * 3 keypad with the up and down buttons. This means that when the partial partial selection method is applied, each button can be divided into 15 grids of 3x5. Likewise, it is not necessary to arrange the up, down, left and right buttons to configure a 5 * 3 keypad as shown in FIG. 8-3.

8.3 Move Button Left or Right Position

The up, down, left and right navigation buttons can also be placed on the left or right side of the 4 * 3 keypad. In this case, in applying the partial partial selection method, the 4 * 4 keypad can be configured by combining the 4 * 3 keypad and the move button. 8-4 shows an example in which the up, down, left, and right moving buttons are provided on the right side of the 4 * 3 keypad.

This tends to increase in the size of the liquid crystal in the terminal, there is an advantage that the size of the liquid crystal of the terminal can be configured larger. In addition, the side battery mounting method of the mobile terminal presented in the applicant's Korean patent applications 10-2000-0002081, 10-2000-0005671, 10-2000-0067852, 10-2001-0002137 has good characteristics when applied in parallel.

8.4 Various use cases as control buttons and buttons for alphabet input

In the following, an example of using the move button is given. It is not limited to the following cases.

8.4.1 Example of use as symbol control button

In the Korean language, the sound control and the sound control are sometimes disposed on the [*] and [#] buttons, respectively. In addition, the sound control and sound control are arranged in the [*] button, and the [#] button is arranged only in the basic vowel control and in the expansion vowel control, and in the case of the [#] button, only the expansion vowel control is arranged. In this case, when the symbol control is placed on the [*] button or the [#] button, the beep, the beep, etc. first appear according to the input after the control button, and then the symbol is selected. The same is true for other languages.

However, if the symbol control is separated and placed in any one of the up, down, left and right buttons, the symbol can be input as soon as the combination of the button associated with the symbol group and the symbol control button in which the symbol control is arranged is input. 8-5 illustrates an example in which the primary function of the down shift button is used as a control button for selecting a symbol control. An example of applying post-control input to a symbol group in the 0-dimensional form is dot = [3] + [v], comma = [3] + [v] + [v], and colon = [3] + [v]. + [v] + [v], semi-colon = [3] + [v] + [v] + [v] + [v],. . . Becomes

8.4.2 Example of using vowel element buttons in Korean

In particular, in the case of using the vowel elements (ㅡ, ㅣ,.) In the Korean example, the vowel elements "." And "ㅎ" were placed together, resulting in inconvenience in inputting "ㅎ". By disposing at any of the left buttons, such inconvenience can be overcome. If the symbol control is placed on the down button and the vowel element "." Is on the up button, two buttons are used on the up, down, left, and right buttons. Alternatively, you can have three Korean vowel elements on the up, down, left and right buttons.

Like the symbol control on the button with the sound control, the Korean vowel element "." At the reference grid position of any of the up and down buttons. In addition, the symbol controls may be placed in a sequence close to the reference grid. 8-6 is such an example. In this case, since the vowel element "." Is not used alone, it is possible to select the vowel element and the symbol control without ambiguity even if the vowel element and the symbol control arranged by the repeated selection method are selected. In FIG. 8-6, when the [v] button is pressed once, the vowel element "." Is selected, and when pressed twice, the symbol control 1 is selected, and the third time, the symbol control 2 is selected.

8.4.3 Example of using a subscript control button in Japanese

In the case of Japanese, the arrangement of the 50th melody is corresponding to each button, the 2nd and 3rd follow-up controls are placed on the [*] button, and the 4th and 5th follow-up controls are placed on the [#] button. The control for inputting the long sound / taking / half-tone can be placed on any of the up and down buttons. See Figures 8-7.

8.4.4 Examples of subscript control buttons for vowel input in Arabic

In Arabic, controls for handling subscript vowels can be distributed to any button (s) of the up and down buttons.

8.4.5 Example of Control Buttons in Thai

In the case of Thai, one control button was used as a subsequent control button without separating the consonant control and the vowel control. Any of the up, down, left and right buttons can be additionally used as a control button. Alternatively, it can be used as a control button of the guitar.

8.5 Example of using shortcut / pull switch control button

When the parallel input method is applied, there is a third order ambiguity between the simple code and the full code. In order to eliminate this, a method of providing a "short / full" conversion control of word units is presented. For example, if you want to use the full input method as the default mode and enter a word by the short input method when applying the parallel input method, first select the "Shortcut / Pull" switching control, enter a space (right button), and enter a simple code. Was to enter. Of course, the order of the spaces and the "short / full" toggle control can be reversed. Here, the word-based "shortcut / full" switching control can be placed on any of the up and down buttons. Alternatively, a control that combines a "short / full" switching control with a space (right button) can be placed at the reference grid position of any of the up, down, left and right buttons. See Figures 8-8.

If it is assumed that the English alphabet shown in Fig. 1-1 is arranged on the number buttons of Figs. 8-8, and the basic alphabet input mode is the full input mode, the simple word "4357" associated with the help is inputted and the word help is entered. If you want to enter, "~ full code input + [^] + [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] + [>] + full code input ~" can be entered. In other words, limiting the movement function of the up / down button [^] and combining the "short / full" switching function of word unit and the space function, the system immediately follows the "[4] + ..." button when the [^] button is pressed. Recognizing that this is a simple code rather than a full code, we can refer to the index and recommend the user the closest word to the input [4]. As soon as the input of [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] is finished and the blank button ([>] button) is pressed, the word is terminated, so the "short / full" mode switching in word units is terminated and the system Waiting for the full code again. If the [^] button is pressed again after the input of the simple code 4357, the system recognizes that the word is terminated and confirms the help corresponding to the simple code 4357 and waits for the input of the simple code again.

If only one right button (blank button) is used in the parallel input method, there may be a third order ambiguity that occurs between the full code and the simple code, as mentioned in the previous application. In addition, it should check whether the simple code exists or achieves the promised full code. However, the system can recognize in advance whether the input value is full code or simple code by putting the button that combines "short / full" mode conversion of word unit and space, so that the system performance can be reduced by reducing the calculation and search. will be.

8.6 Use Cases in Calculator Mode

The four navigation buttons are useful as the plus or minus (+,-, x, /) buttons most often used in calculator mode regardless of their position. You can also add or subtract symbols from the buttons, but the calculator may not be used as often as the alphabet input, so it may not appear on the buttons. This is because each button in the alphabet input mode will be used as a move button or a control button.

It is also possible to place an operator that can be used in a calculator on a subtraction subtraction button and select it by the (hidden) iterative selection method. Operators (binary operators) that are often used in calculator mode use properties that do not appear repeatedly. For example, there can be no calculation of 2 ++ 1. 24 can also be solved by pressing 2x4 to select the "square" operator by repeatedly pressing the multiplier (x) button. In other words, it is equivalent to repeatedly selecting the multiplication (xx) operator as a subsequent operator in the multiplication (x) button. Similarly, (O3) can be solved by pressing 3 // 2 to select the "square root" operator by repeatedly pressing the (/) button. Since the other binary operators do not appear in duplicate, they can be left as successors belonging to the appropriate addition and subtraction control buttons and selected by the iterative selection method.

Three buttons of up, down, left, and right navigation buttons can be added to the subtractor (+,-, /) operator and the (x) operator can use the [*] button.

9. Activating help function

Here, in each input mode, functions not displayed on the buttons (up / down / left / right) can be displayed on the screen (liquid crystal) to add convenience to use. In this case, there is a drawback of consuming a portion of the liquid crystal, of course, the user who digitizes the function of each operator button does not need to be displayed while consuming the space of the liquid crystal, but it can be very helpful for users who do not. Referring to FIG. 8-1, FIG. 9-1 illustrates an example in which the up, down, left, and right buttons are arranged in a similar form, assuming that the up, down, left, and right buttons are arranged on the right side of the 4 * 3 keypad.

In this way, displaying a function of a button (that is, an operator assigned to the button or a symbol group associated with each button) according to the user's convenience and intention is referred to as "activating a help function" for convenience. Activation of the help function can be done for each mode (e.g. alphabet input mode, calculator mode), or for each of the required functions (e.g. the use of numeric buttons or control buttons associated with a symbol group in the alphabet input mode). It may be.

Similarly, the numeric buttons associated with the function of the control button or the symbol group presented in the previous application can also be convenient for the user by displaying on the liquid crystal when necessary. See Figure 9-2. Fig. 9-2 shows an example in which the number buttons associated with each symbol group are iconized and displayed on the liquid crystal based on the symbol group classification exemplified above. Of the symbols of the symbol group associated with each number button, only the first selected symbol is added to the number button icon.

10. How to use the delete button

In using the delete button, it can be used as the "cancel final input" introduced in the earlier application. For example, in Figure 4-2, the user inputs "a", enters "1" + [*], and enters "ㅋ". Pressing the delete button cancels the last input ([*]) and returns to "a". It can be done. This can be useful for entering subsequent alphabets by repeatedly pressing the control buttons. If the cancel button is pressed continuously, the alphabet already input is deleted as usual. For example, if you press the Cancel button once while entering "Kana-K", it becomes "Kana-A". If you press it once more, it becomes "Kana", and if you press it again, it becomes "A-K". If you type "aba .." in the Roman alphabet (the last "a .." is a modified alphabet consisting of ".. + a"), press the delete button once to become "aba", then press "ab" again. When pressed again, it becomes "a". That is, alphabets already formed are deleted in alphabetical units.

11.Unification of numeric keypad of keyboard and keypad of telephone terminal

It is apparent that the keypad disclosed in the present application and the present invention can be applied to all fields in the form of a telephone keyboard, such as a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard or a keypad or door lock configured in software on a screen. In addition, the numeric keypad provided on the standard keyboard is different from the arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons presented in the earlier application and the present invention, it is apparent that the arrangement on the keypad button in the prior application and the present invention can also be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard. For example, in the present application and in the present invention, the alphabet disposed on the [1] button is placed on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and in the same manner below, alphabet input, utilization of simple codes, and memorization of various codes. Can be used for

However, in order to reduce confusion and add convenience of use, the numeric keypad of the telephone keypad can be utilized in configuring the numeric keypad of the keyboard. In other words, in the arrangement of numbers on the numeric keypad of the keyboard, the [1], [2], and [3] buttons are placed on the buttons in the first row as in the keypad of the telephone, and the buttons [4], [5] are placed on the buttons in the second row. , [6] button, and three rows of buttons [7], [8], [9] button. In addition, you can place the [*] and [#] buttons as you would on a phone keypad.

12. Language restriction input method

The language limit input method means reducing ambiguity in character input by using a combination of consonants and vowels in word generation of a specific language, which will be described in detail below.

It is obvious that any of the contents mentioned in one language below can be applied to other languages without special mention. Furthermore, similar concepts can be applied to languages that do not use the Roman alphabet.

12.1 Chinese Restriction Selection Method on the Alphabetic Separator Keypad in Roman Alphabet

12.1.1 Composition of Chinese Virgins and Mica

(^e) 는 거의 사용되지 않는다고 함)가 있다고 한다. 성모는 자음에 해당하고, 운모는 모음에 해당한다고 한다. 중국대륙에서는 중국어음을 표기하는 방법으로 한어병음방안을 이용하고, 대만에서는 주음부호를 이용하여 중국어음을 입력한다고 한다. 한어병음은 라틴자모즉 로마알파벳을 이용하여 중국어음을 표기하는 것이다. 주음부호와 그에 대응되는 한어병음(로마알파벳)을 괄로안에 표시하면 다음과 같다. Chinese has 21 virgins and 16 micas (double

(^ e) is rarely used). Our Lady corresponds to consonants, and mica corresponds to vowels. Chinese continents use the Chinese Pinyin method as a method of marking Chinese sounds, and in Taiwan, Chinese sounds are input using the main phone sign. Chinese Pinyin is written in Latin using the Latin alphabet, or Roman alphabet. The main phonetic code and the corresponding Chinese Pinyin (Roman alphabet) are shown in brackets as follows.

The following describes the combined mica in Chinese. Combined mica is said to combine three vowels i, u and ..u, followed by other mica. The following table is the list of possible combinations in the Mica List.

In the above table, it is possible to combine ia but not io.

12.1.2 Input of Chinese Pinyin Using Roman Alphabet                     

After all, as you can see from the table above, if you use Roman alphabet, 21 Chinese virgins can be entered in a combination of 18 Roman alphabets, and 16 mica can be a combination of 7 mica or Roman alphabet vowels and Romans. All combinations of alphabetic consonants can be entered.

In addition, ^ e and ..u of short mica are regarded as the modified alphabet of e and u and can be inputted by the control method. Next, four tones can be attached to the five basic vowels, which can also be input by the control processing method. After all, in the case of Chinese using the Roman alphabet, the five Roman alphabet basic vowels can input all Chinese mica. This inputs the modified alphabet that does not exist in the English alphabet (ie, Roman alphabet) by the control processing method, which is already shown in the input of French and German. An example of setting the sub-relationship between the basic alphabet (basic vowel) and the subsequent alphabet (subsequent vowel) when entering Chinese mica by the control processing method is as follows.

In the example above, the alphabet with the first to fourth tones of the first and fourth tones is the next alphabet, and ^ e is rarely used. Sub ranks may vary depending on the frequency of use, of course. For example, you can make ..u a 2nd follow-up alphabet instead of 6th and place the sub-orders of the remaining follow-up alphabets one after the other.

Using the [*] button, the control button as an input example, and when after the control input applied, ^- e = e + [*], ^/ e = e + [*] + [*], ^v e = e + [*] + [*] + [*], `e = e + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*], ^ e = e + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*] It becomes like + [*]. When the partial full selection method is applied to " e " displayed on the keypad in Fig. 1-1, e = [3] + [2], and -e = [3] + [2] + [*]. If the alphabet displayed on the keypad in Fig. 1-1 is selected by the partial full selection method, the full code of 人 (r ^/ en: 2nd star) becomes "7832 ** 65". It is obvious that any other input method (e.g., simple repetitive selection method) may be used to input "e" displayed on the keypad.

After all, only one control button is used to simplify the input method. The same applies to the case of using the main phone number without using the Roman alphabet (for example, the same input method is applied to the keypad displaying the main phone number corresponding to the English alphabet in FIG. 1-1).

12.1.3 Chinese Restriction Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad                     

You can enter all the Chinese Virgins in 18 Roman alphabets, of which only zh, ch, and sh appear consecutive Roman alphabets. In Chinese, syllables that contain only mica without a mother are written in Chinese Pinyin, and are written with y, w, and so on. For example, "衣 = yi (one star)" and "五 = wu (three star)".

And, as mentioned in the previous application, it can be very convenient to use syllable-based initial codes as simple codes in Chinese, where Hanja (漢字) Hangul consists of one syllable. Therefore, it is desirable to assign as many as eighteen Roman alphabet consonants to each numeric button. In the present invention, 18 roman alphabet consonants are grouped by two and are assigned to the [1] to [9] number buttons.

bp / dt / gk / zj / cq / sx / mn / lr / hf

The above example is a grouping based on the similarity of pronunciation. When using simple codes, if there are many phrases (words or phrases) corresponding to the same simple code (syllable standard initial code), similar phrases with similar pronunciation are based on the same syllable. It was considered to have initial code. The above example is just one example and many variations are possible. Grouping may be based on the similarity of pronunciation, and the grouping may be performed according to various criteria such as English alphabet dictionary order and English alphabet corresponding note code dictionary order. Another advantage of grouping similar pronunciations in the same group and assigning them to the same button is that in all the languages that use the Roman alphabet, the consonants of similar pronunciations are less likely to occur in succession, thus reducing the possibility of ambiguity. will be. In addition, even in the use of simple chords (especially syllable-based initial chords), even if there are many phrases corresponding to the same simple chords, the phrases have similar pronunciations (phonetics), thus minimizing confusion to users, Can give a feeling.

Another is that zh, ch, and sh exist as Mother of China, so that z and h are not grouped into the same group. (In Chinese, syllables are usually composed of "Our Lady + Mica". In this embodiment, even if they are grouped into the same group, it does not matter much. However, when inputting w, y, v, etc. not shown in FIG. , w, etc. must be assigned together and not assigned to the assigned button 3)

The nine groups illustrated above can be arbitrarily assigned to nine buttons [1] to [9] as shown in Fig. 10-1, and a repeat selection method can be applied to the input of each alphabet. Due to the characteristics of Chinese, when entering the Virgin, there is no case where the Roman alphabet consonants appear consecutively except in the case of zh, ch, sh. Therefore, even if the alphabet is input by the iterative selection method, it is possible to input without ambiguity. For example, in FIG. 10-1, b = [1] and p = [1] + [1]. Which alphabet of the alphabet assigned to each button is to be selected as one stroke can be determined so that the alphabet with a high frequency of use can be selected as one stroke according to the frequency of use of the alphabet.

Roman alphabet "v", which is rarely used in Chinese, can be placed in any of nine groups. For example, you can add "v" to a group with similar "f" pronunciations (or not assign it explicitly) and enter "v" with the corresponding button three. W, and y used in "衣 = yi (1 star)", "五 = wu (3 star)", etc. are also placed in the appropriate consonant group (or not assigned explicitly) and inputted by the repeated selection method (eg enter w and y as the three buttons to which each alphabet belongs. For example, if y is placed in a group to which / l and r / belong, the corresponding button ([8] button in Fig. 10-1) inputs “l” with 1 key, “r” with 2 keys, and 3 Enter “y” for tarot, if w / m, n / is placed in a cold group, enter 1 ta “m” for the corresponding button ([7] button in Fig. 10-1), and enter 2 ta for “n” And then type “w” as a third.

By applying the iterative selection method, it is called “Chinese Restriction Iterative Selection Method” for convenience to greatly reduce the ambiguity by alternating Roman alphabet consonants and vowels when entering Chinese Pinyin. This property is commonly referred to as “Language Restricted Repeat Selection Method (LRRSM)” for convenience when applied to all languages, not just Chinese, and “Chiese” when it is specifically applied to Chinese. Restricted RSM ”. In the Korean language or Hindi language, the repetitive selection method is to assign a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels to each button, and when applying the repetitive selection method, the consonants and vowels are alternately used to input with less ambiguity. It is in the same context. Also, in the method using Korean vowel elements, it is similar that the vowel control can be selected by the repetitive selection method using the property that the vowel “ㅡ” does not appear continuously. This is called “Korean Repetitive Selection Method”. Can be.                     

In particular, as shown in Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, a button to which consonants are assigned (conventionally referred to as a “consonant button”) and a button to which a vowel is assigned (conventionally referred to as a “vowel button”) are separated (that is, consonants and vowels). Without assigning to the same button), it is a good feature to greatly reduce ambiguity by using the characteristics of each language combined with consonants and vowels when applying the repeated selection method. Like this, in Fig. 10-1 to 10-4, the consonant button and the vowel button are separated, respectively, and each button has a predetermined number (eg, 1 to 3) of the consonants or vowels. Keypad (CVSK (Consonant Vowal Separated Keypad)).

It can be easily seen that the Chinese alphabet pinyin can be inputted without ambiguity even when the Chinese alphabet pinyin and vowels displayed on the keypad are repeatedly selected in FIG. 10-1. When the same button among the consonant buttons ([1] to [9] buttons in Fig. 10-1) is pressed in succession for the input of the Virgin, the system can easily know that the second consonant displayed on the keypad is input. This is because the same Roman alphabet is not used in succession to enter the Virgin Mary. In this case, the button pressed twice is a button to which w, y, v, etc. are assigned, and when the same button is pressed once more (that is, pressed three times), as described above, inputting w, y, v, etc. The system can easily see what it is for. [7] If you enter "w = 777" with three buttons, it can be interpreted as "mmm" or "mn" or "nm", since the Virgin of Chinese is not constructed in this way.

As shown in Fig. 10-1, the six vowels of a, e, i, o, u, ..u are divided into three groups of two by three and three buttons (e.g. [*], [0] of the 4 * 3 keypad. ], [#] Button) and each vowel can be entered without ambiguity by the repeated selection method. This is possible because the same Roman alphabet vowel does not appear twice in Chinese. For example, when a Chinese character is written in Chinese Pinyin, there is no such thing as "… aa ...".

However, if we look at the mica ai, ei, ou and the combined mica ia, ie, uo, we can see that a and i, e and i and o and u should not be grouped into the same group. If a and i are grouped into the same group and assigned to the same button (e.g. [*] button), inputting the corresponding button 3 strokes (ie '***') means 'ai' or 'ia' This is because ambiguity may occur, for example, if you enter '.' 10-1 shows an example of grouping in consideration of such contents. The vowel grouping and arrangement of FIG. 10-1 is not absolute and may be modified as long as the above constraints are satisfied. In FIG. 10-1, each vowel can be input by a repetitive selection method. For example, i = [0], o = [0] + [0], iao = [0] + [*] + [0] + [0].

a and i and e and i and o and u are grouped together as “a, e, o” (see FIGS. 10-2 and 10-4), unless they are grouped into the same group (see Figures 10-2 and 10-4). “I, u, u” can be a group. Again, various modifications are possible. Assign these two vowel groups to any button (e.g. [*] and [#] buttons respectively) within the 3 * 4 keypad, and assign the consonant “w, y, v” as separate groups to the rest of the buttons (e.g. [0] button). When three alphabets are grouped in one group (eg "a, e, o"), they correspond to the corresponding button three strokes representing a combination of vowels (eg "ae", "ea", "aaa") Since the Chinese mica does not exist, "o" can be recognized without ambiguity with the corresponding button 3 strokes. In the example, when inputting "ao", the corresponding button is 4 strokes, and since "oa" does not exist as a Chinese pinyin, it can also be recognized without ambiguity. Referring to Fig. 10-6, "v" in Fig. 10-6 is Chinese. Since it is not used for input of, it may not be displayed, and grouping “w, y” into one group and assigning them to the same button has the effect of assigning half consonants (ie, half vowels) to the same button.

In FIGS. 10-2, 10-4, and 10-6, “a, e, o” are grouped into the same group, and only a combination of “ao” is possible. If only one button is assigned "a, o", that button three strokes can be recognized as "ao" without ambiguity. However, three letters are assigned, depending on the number of button presses, “a? o? If it is selected in the order of "e", an ambiguity may occur in which it is not known whether pressing the button three times is "ao" or "e". Therefore, in this case (three or more vowels are assigned to the same button and one combination of two of the three vowels is possible), the two vowelable vowels can be selected as 1 and 2 strokes, respectively, The ambiguity can be removed by using language restrictions by selecting one stroke, three strokes (or two strokes, three strokes, which can be recognized as “ao”). In summary, in determining the selection order according to the number of button presses in the three alphabetic groups, the selection order is determined so that alphabets that can appear in succession are not selected by the corresponding button 1 and the second stroke, respectively.

10-1 ~ 10-4, when entering the Virgin Mary with the Roman alphabet, the same button can be pressed up to 2-3 times, the system recognizes the number of repeated presses of the button, the target alphabet according to the number of repeated presses Can be identified. When inputting mica into Roman alphabet, if the same button can be pressed three times in succession in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-3, the [0] button is continuously entered to input “io” of the combined mica “iou”. Only when pressed three times. For user input, the system will temporarily recognize “0 = i” and confirm when a button other than the [0] button is pressed. When the [0] button is pressed once more, the system will temporarily display “00 = o”. If the button other than the [0] button is pressed once more, the system can determine “000 = io” when the [0] button is pressed again. This is because “oi” is not used and “oi” is not used. The [*] button can be pressed up to two times, so the system temporarily recognizes “* = a” and “**”. = e ”This is because the same Roman alphabet vowels do not appear in succession when entering Chinese Pinyin, and the vowels assigned to the same button do not appear in succession.

The reason that the input system can be configured without any ambiguity (or significantly less ambiguity in non-Chinese) on the consonant separation keypad is that the same consonant button (e.g., the [1] button in Fig. 10-1) is pressed once or continuously. While losing, the system recognizes the input of one of the consonants in the same button, followed by pressing another consonant button (eg, the [9] button in Figs. Because. Another reason is that about two alpha bets are assigned instead of about three alphabets for each button. As mentioned in the earlier application when grouping consonants and vowels in pairs, the probability of ambiguity is significantly reduced when two alphabets are assigned as compared to three alphabets per button, which is readily apparent. In addition, when two alphabets are assigned to each button, the batter delay time and batter delay time presented by the applicant can be applied more effectively.

10-7 show procedures of the general repetition selection method in the consonant separation keypad except for the portion (R). In FIG. 10-7, for convenience, the input value is a consonant button or a vowel button. In other words, it is assumed that there are no special uses or functions (eg follow-up control buttons for input of follow-up alphabets). 10-7 are not absolute and can only be referred to. In FIG. 10-7, the detailed procedure such as temporarily recognizing the alphabet corresponding to one pressing of the specific button with the target alphabet when the specific button is pressed once is not displayed. However, this process may be performed in process (R0) of FIGS. 10-7. Language restrictions can be determined in step (R), and step (R) can be involved in any part of the flowchart. That is, if the first input value is one of the consonant buttons, the button that is consecutively pressed is assigned to only two consonants, and the alphabet assigned to the same button does not appear in succession (eg, the [1] button in Fig. 10-1). ), At the moment when the same button is pressed twice in R1, the input value can be determined as one consonant (eg, “P” in Fig. 10-1). This is similar to removing ambiguity using language restrictions in Figs. 4-4 (confirm the target alphabet with no ambiguity or less ambiguity when applying the repetition selection method). It can be seen that the procedure of Figures 10-7 is much simpler than the procedure of Figures 4-4.                     

When the same or unequal consonant buttons are pressed in succession, when the vowel button is pressed, the system determines the target alphabet from the input values of the previously entered consonant buttons, proceeds with the vowel processing, and the initial input values during the vowel processing. Becomes the last vowel button entered during the consonant process. The same applies to the case of changing from the vowel processing to the consonant processing.

The method of judging by the language restriction (R) in Fig. 10-7 is a list of consonant and vowels that can be combined (eg “ch”, “sh”, “zh”, “iao”, “iou”, “ia”, “Ie”, “uai”, “uei”, “ua”, “uo”, “ue”, “ai”, “ao”, “ua”, “uo”, “..ue”, “ou”… ) Or a list of non-combinable consonants and vowels (e.g. “bb”, “aa”, “ee”, “oa”,…), or where ambiguity may occur on a particular keypad. In cases where this ambiguity can be caused, it is generally possible to have a system that recognizes the bindable case as a target alphabet except for the non-bindable case, for example, in FIG. When you enter ao = 0000 ”, the system will have“ ao ”in the vowelable list, while the system will recognize“ ao ”as the target alphabet for the input value“ 0000 ”. Another method is that in the case of the user's incorrect input of the consonant separation keypad of FIGS. 10-2 and 10-4, only the [0] button can be pressed up to four times. In this case, only “0000 = ao” may be recognized in this case, and the rest of the process may be performed according to the processing of FIGS.

It can be seen that the procedure of the parts omitted in FIGS. 10-7 is similar to the procedure indicated previously. 10-7 will be more generalized, and will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8. 10-8 has the same meaning as FIG. 10-7. In FIG. 10-8, the {1} part virtually means that the button input is made, and “n <-(n + 1)” indicated by the arrow entering the (1) part means that the number of button presses is increased one more time. it means.

In the case of Chinese syllables as Pinyin, when mica such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", and "er" is used, the syllable ends with English consonants (English alphabet consonants) (Eg ren: 人). That is, the English alphabet consonants that can come to the end of a syllable in the middle of a word or phrase are "n", "g", "r", and so on. The consonants that can come to an end of a syllable of the Pinyin are called "consonants which can be at the End of a Syllable of Pinyin" (CCESP) for convenience.

In the case of syllables in which such consonant syllables are used (ie, syllables in which mica such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", and "er" is used), Ambiguity can occur when the consonant is the English consonant of the previous syllable. For example, in the case of Zhongguo (中國), "~ gg ~" can be recognized as "~ k ~". In this very special case, ambiguity can occur, which is caused by having the Pinyin syllable end consonants (e.g. "n", "g", "r" ...) be selected as the corresponding button two in each group to which they belong. Can be removed (when only two alphabets are assigned to the group to which "n", "g", "r", etc. belong, as in Fig. 10-6).

In Fig. 10-6, "n", one of the consonant possible consonants of the Pinyin syllable, is selected as the corresponding button ([7] button), so that in the case of "rennai", "88 ** 7777 * #" is entered without ambiguity. It's like you can. You enter "7777" to enter "nn", which can be recognized as "nn" without ambiguity ("mmmm", "nmm", "mnm", "mmn in the middle of a word or phrase in Pinyin). ", So combinations are not possible). That is, if the selection order of "g" and "k" is "k-g" in Fig. 10-6, the pinyin can be input without ambiguity.

In order to remove ambiguity, two alphabets should be grouped in the group so that the consonant syllable is selected as two strokes in the group. If the three English alphabets "m, n, w" are grouped as shown in Fig. 10-4 and are selected in the order of "m-n-w" according to the number of button presses, "n" corresponds to the corresponding button 2 Even if it is chosen as the other, entering "renmin (人民)" will cause ambiguity with "rewin" (where "rewin" does not actually exist in Chinese Pinyin, the system will change the input to "renmin (人民)"). It may be recognized, but "rewin" is a possible pinyin combination).

Therefore, when it is possible to group three English consonants as shown in FIG. 10-4, the pinyin syllable ending consonants ("n", "g", "r", etc.) may be grouped into groups in which two English consonants are grouped. It can be seen that there is a need. And even when the consonants are grouped by two, it can be seen that ambiguity may also occur when "n" and "r" and "g" and "r" are grouped into the same group among the consonant syllables. For example, if two English consonants "n" and "r" are grouped in the same group, typing "~ nr ~" will cause ambiguity with "~ rn ~". The same is true when "g" and "r" are grouped into the same group.                     

In Fig. 10- *, "n" and "g" are assigned to different buttons so that they can be entered without ambiguity. Of course, even if "n" and "g" are grouped in the same group, if only "n" and "g" are grouped, they can be entered without ambiguity. For example, if "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to the [5] button, the [5] button is pressed three times (ie "555" is entered to enter "vowel + ng"). Can be recognized as "collection + ng" rather than "collection + gn". This is because it is possible to use language restrictions in the pinyin where no "vowel + gn" appears in the middle of a word. When "n" and "g" are grouped in the same group like this, if the selection order according to the number of button presses is "g-n", "g" is displayed when the corresponding button is pressed twice, and once more When pressed, "ng" can be displayed so that WISWYG (What You See is What You Get, more precisely What You Press is What You See) can be realized. In FIGS. 10-2, 10-4, and 10-6, the vowels "a", "e", and "o" are grouped into one group and assigned to the [*] button (example of Figure 10-6). If you select "o-e-a" in order of pressing the button, the system recognizes "a" and displays it again when the [*] button is pressed three times. When the button is pressed once more, it naturally shows "ao" so that the user can be more friendly.

When only "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to a button (in the example, [5] button), if "5555" is entered after the vowel button is pressed, it is recognized as "vowel + ngg". If "55555" is entered, it will be recognized as "vowel + ngn". If "vowel + ng" is used relatively frequently in Chinese Pinyin, grouping "n" and "g" into the same group can improve input convenience. However, it is not a good approach to group consonants with similar pronunciations in the same group for the use of simple codes.

When English consonants (eg 'm') other than "n" and "g" are grouped together, in order of "m-n-g" or "m-g-n", to enter the pinyin without ambiguity If it is selected (that is, if a consonant other than 'n' and 'g' is selected as the corresponding button 1), it can also be recognized without ambiguity. For example, if you select "m-g-n" according to the number of button presses, the vowel button is pressed five times and the button is recognized as "(collection) + ng", and the sixth press is pressed. With "(vowel) + ngm", seven presses can be recognized as "(vowel) + ngg" and eight presses can be recognized as "(vowel) + ngn" without ambiguity. However, since the number of times of repeated presses at the time of inputting "ng" becomes excessive, it is not preferable.

In Figs. 10-7, 10-8, and 10-9, "nX", "ngX", and "rX" (capital letter "X" in the consonant process in the middle of a word but not at the beginning of the word are used as English consonants. In the case of continuous consonants, the input values may be processed by consonant combinations possible in Pinyin. This is because English consonants, such as "nX", "ngX", and "rX", do not appear at the beginning of a word. Eventually, in the input of Pinyin, the English consonants that can appear in the middle of a word or phrase are theoretically maximum of four, such as "~ ngch ~", "~ ngsh ~", "~ ngzh ~", and Figs. 10-7, 10 You can use these language restrictions in consonants in the middle of words at -8, 10-9.

The English consonants were moved to the end of the syllables, so that even if ambiguity could occur, the method could be input without ambiguity. In the alphabet group assigned to each button, the selection order according to the number of presses of the buttons can be arbitrarily determined, which may be regarded as a detailed description of the contents suggested by the previous application. Pinyin syllables end consonants are consonants that can be used both at the beginning and end of the syllables, so they can be seen as relatively frequently used consonants, and this ambiguity can be seen as not a frequent occurrence. The Pinyin syllable ending consonants are selected in each group to which the Pinyin syllables end consonants can be excluded by referring to the Pinyin / Chinese index. You will be able to set the order.

In Fig. 10-1 including the above contents, it is possible to input at an average of 1.5 strokes per Roman alphabet, and if the frequent alphabet is selected as one stroke in consideration of the actual frequency of use in Chinese, it will be possible to input with fewer input strokes. .

12.1.4 Entering the Original Function of a Function Button Used as a Control Button

In FIG. 10-1, when inputting a modified alphabet attached to a Roman alphabet vowel, any “separate button” outside the 3 * 4 keypad may be used as a control button. For example, if utilized in the Chinese input mode, the left (左) side button ([<]) to the control ^{button, - e = e + [<} ], / e = e + [<] + [<], v e = e + [<] + [<] + [<], `e = e + [<] + [<] + [<] + [<], ^ e = e + [<] + [<] + [ It can be entered as <] + [<] + [<]. If you press the left button five times in succession, you can no longer select the control that combines with “e”. "E" is entered). If (shown for convenience "[X]") Delete button, if used as a control button for variation alphabet <sup>input, - e = e + [X</sup> ], / e = e + [X] + [X], v e = e + [X] + [X] + [X], `e = e + [X] + [X] + [X] + [X], ^ e = e + [X] + [X] + [X] It can be entered as + [X] + [X]. If you press the delete button five times in succession, the previously entered “e” can be deleted. A button having a different function can be used as a control button, but if a control is selected according to the number of times the control button is pressed, the original function (eg, a moving function) can be selected if there is no control selected. .

In the above example, after the left shift function is activated, the word starts, so the left shift function is input even if the left shift button [<] is pressed only once. That is, if you press “<” button five times after entering “e”, the cursor moves one space to the left with only “e” input, and once again, it moves one space to the side again. This is applicable in all languages.

12.1.5 Chinese Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad (Entering Modified Alphabet in the 3 * 4 Keypad)

Here, it appears that you can enter a modified alphabet (including the case of a ton) with a subscript on the Roman alphabet set within a 3 * 4 keypad.

The combined mica list shows that the vowels that cannot come after "i" are "i" and "u" (in other words, 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). You can also see that the vowels that cannot come after "u" are "u" and "i" (in other words, 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). Therefore, the arrangement of vowels as shown in Fig. 10-2 is possible. In FIG. 10-2, when attaching the tones to the left vowels "i, a, e", the [#] button to which the right "u" is assigned may be used as a control button. Likewise, when adding the tonal code to the right vowel “o, u”, use the left [*] button as the tonal symbol control button. For example, / o (secondary) = o + [*] + [*] = [0] + [0] + [0] + [*] + [*], and / a (secondary) = a + [#] + [#] = [0] + [#] + [#], ^ e = e + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] = [0 ] + [0] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#]. You can enter a mica ao = a + o = [0] + [0] + [0] + [0], and since vowel a cannot come after vowels a, e, etc. It can be identified in the system without ambiguity. The vowel ^.. u has a similarity in shape to the vowel u, so you can enter the button to which u is assigned in two strokes.

This uses the property that the vowel u does not appear after a and e in the vowels "a, e, o" in Chinese, and the vowel i does not appear after vowel o. The constraints described above, namely a and i, and e and i and o and u, are not placed in the same group, but are assigned two vowels to three buttons, using the Roman alphabet vowel combining rule of Chinese Figure 10-2. As you can see, it is impossible to use a button with a vowel as a control button. In FIG. 10-2, the i and u are placed on the [*] button or the [#] button in consideration of the points for ease of recognition and the balance of arrangement, etc., in using these buttons as control buttons. The average input stroke of the vowel in Fig. 10-2 is also about 1.5 strokes as in Fig. 10-1.

As a variation of Fig. 10-2, some of the three letters assigned to the [0] button may be separated into "separate buttons" outside the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, any of the up / down / left buttons may be used to divide and assign some of the three alphabets.

It is possible to input the Chinese Pinyin without ambiguity while applying the repetition selection method in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, as shown in FIG. 10-1 and [9] and [0], [0], [ #] Button, and Roman alphabet's consonant and vowel appearance rules are used when Chinese is written as Chinese Pinyin.

12.2 English Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In the case of English and the like, the repetitive selection method can be applied in a consonant separation keypad (CVSK) similar to that of Chinese, similarly to those of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4. This is because in all languages that use Roman alphabet, the structure of words consists of alternating consonants and vowels.

In English, when the consonant group is repeated as much as possible from "word start", it is called "CCCVCCCC" as in "strengths" (C is consonant, V is vowel). There can be up to three consonants at the beginning of a word, but this is only the case that starts with "st ~" or "sp ~" (eg, spree, spleen, strength, etc.).

Similar to FIG. 10-1, the user inputs the English word "student" on a keypad assigned about 2 to 3 consonants (assuming that only "..u" is not assigned in FIG. 10-1 for convenience). In order to input "622 ~", the system can treat "622" entered after "Word start" as "st" instead of "sdd". If the consonants can be continuous, it is said that they start with "st ~" or "sp ~" and the system needs to remember these English word generation rules or alphabet combining rules). When you enter "u" in "stu ~", you can see that the consonant group ("st" in the example) ends and the vowel ("u" in the example) comes because the button to which the vowel is assigned is pressed. If you input "2" to input "d" after "stu", you can see the consonant starts again. Likewise, when a user enters "~ ** 7722" to enter "~ ent" of "student" and "**" is entered, "a" does not appear in English as described in the earlier application. Therefore, it is easy for the system to know that "e" is entered instead of "aa", and can also be interpreted as "mmt", "ndd", "nt", "mmdd", etc. for "7722". As mentioned above, by setting the "battery delay time" and "other delay time" differently, the ambiguity generated in the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced.

The ambiguity that can occur when applying the repeated selection method by reflecting the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule) of a specific language in the current standard English keypad (Fig. 1-1) assigned to each button with consonants and vowels mixed. Can be reduced. However, when consonants and vowels are assigned to a single button, it becomes very difficult to apply a language restriction input method (especially a repetitive selection method as a full input method). For example, in FIG. 1-1, when the user inputs the "student" using the repeated selection method, "stu ~" becomes "777888 ~", even though it is assumed that the system recognizes "s" as "s". , You won't know if "888" is "ut" ("sut"), "tu" ("stu"), or "v" ("sv"). Since "ttt" cannot follow, the system can assume that it is not "ttt" for input "888"). Similarly, when the user enters "333" to enter "~ de ~", it is not known whether it is "de" or "ed". "888777" entered before "~ de ~" is "sut", "stu" "," may be interpreted as "sv", so for each of the three cases, all cases of "~ de ~" and "~ ed ~" may come.

Even if the language-limited input method is applied, a lot of ambiguity occurs when the iterative selection method is applied as the full input method. This is because the input value for inputting consonants or vowels is not clearly distinguished. 10-1 When consonants and vowels are separately assigned as shown in FIG. 10-4, when a button to which a vowel is assigned is pressed when the repeated selection method is applied, the vowel is assigned to the vowel. It is for inputting ground consonants, which can greatly reduce ambiguity because the system can recognize them.

In English using Roman alphabets, there are many cases where two or more vowels appear consecutively (eg, 'ai' in captain). Also, the same vowels (base vowels a, e, i, o, u) in real words are relatively frequent in oo and ee like food and teen, and rarely in uu like vacuum. Applicant has not yet seen a case of ... aa ... and ... ii ... in the existing words in the English dictionary. Therefore, in assigning the five basic English vowels to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, selecting 'a' as one stroke and selecting the remaining two among e, o, and u are actually two cases. Ambiguity is removed. For example, if the [*] button has the vowels 'a, o' and the repeat selection method is applied, when two [*] buttons are entered, two vowels aa are not entered, and the vowel o is entered. This can be considered. Similarly, if you assign 'i, u' to the [0] button and apply the repeat selection method, when two [0] buttons are entered, two vowels ii are not entered, but a vowel u is entered. This can be recognized. Although it is not absolute that a word does not appear consecutively as aa, ii, the ambiguity can be almost eliminated by setting different “delay time” and “other time delay” mentioned in the earlier application. The rest of the vowel 'e' can be assigned to the rest of the [#] buttons and typed in one stroke.

If you want to use one of the [*], [0] and [#] buttons as a special purpose button, you can put the vowel 'e' on any button to which the vowel is assigned. For example, you can put 'i, e, u' on the [0] button. The vowel u is entered using the [0] button 3 strokes, because the vowel u is the least frequently used vowel in English. In the end, i and e can be entered without ambiguity unless i, e, u are assigned to the [0] button and i does not occur in English in succession (ie ... ii ...). 1 u, 2 h) and u [0] button 3 strokes, u, ie, ei unknown ambiguity occurs. A low frequency of use of u means fewer cases.

As a result, the ambiguity can be greatly reduced by using a consonant separation pad, and furthermore, in assigning a plurality of vowels to a single button, one vowel is selected among the English words in the dictionary that do not have the same vowel in succession. In order to input a vowel in a repetitive selection method from a button to which a plurality of vowels are assigned, the vowel can be input almost without ambiguity.

This selection of one vowel that does not appear in succession and three vowels with the least frequently used vowels are equally applicable to the case where about two or three consonants are assigned per button.

In the above, the case of English using the Roman alphabet is described as an example, but the same applies to other languages using the Roman alphabet.

12.3 Indonesian Restriction Repetition Selection Method in the Keypad Separator

In Indonesian, roman alphabets are used to write words. Indonesian syllables are said to be organized as follows: (C is consonant, V is vowel)

V: be-a tariff                     

VC: catch am-bil

CV: Rub go-sok

CVC: pon-dol cabin

CCV: tra-di-si tradition

CCVC: con-trak contract

CVCC: teks-tur fabric

CCCV: kon-struk-si construction

CCCVC: strip-tis nude dance

If more than three consonants are easy to see foreign words from English, etc .. As can be seen from the above, even in the case of Indonesian, if you do not start with "st ~" or "sp ~", you can guess that three or more consonants are not repeated at the beginning of the word. Therefore, using the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule), it is possible to apply the Indonesian restriction repetition selection method.

q and x are said to be used in natural science symbols such as physics and mathematics. That is, it is thought that it is rarely used for character input. Therefore, q and x may not be arranged explicitly in a specific group, and may be input in three strokes as input. In addition, as in the case of Chinese, two or more Roman alphabets may be combined to express one Indonesian sound, and there are four types of ny, sy, kh, and ng.

Other consonants that are not ironed are bl, br, dr, dw, dy, fl, fr, gl, kr, ks, kw, pl, ps, rps, rs, sk, skr, sl, sp, spr, sr, str and sw. In particular, since "skr ~", "spr ~", "str ~" may appear at the beginning of the word, it can be used as a means for determining whether the input value is a full code or a simple code in the language restriction parallel input method described later. (As an applicant, “rps” may be at the beginning of a word, but you can use it as well.)

Any of the 19 consonants except q and x in the 21 English alphabet consonants can be grouped into 9 groups, but they can be grouped to reflect Indonesian characteristics. E.g,

BP / DT / GK / CJ / MN / LR / SZ / FV / HWY

Can be grouped as:

q and x can be grouped into appropriate groups. For example, you could put q in the “GK” group and group x in the “SZ” group.

Five vowels a, i, u, e and o are used to represent Indonesian vowels. There are also three double vowels ai, au and oi, and oi is very rarely used. Thus, even in grouping five vowels into two or three groups, it would be desirable to avoid a and i and a and u not to be grouped in the same group as much as possible. For example, grouping like ae / uo / i Also, as in the case of English, it would be desirable to select a vowel in which the same vowel does not appear in succession (even if it appears in succession) with one button belonging to the vowel in each group.

12.4 How to Select Japanese Repetition Repetition on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Japanese input, a method of inputting Japanese pronunciation using Roman alphabet and converting it back to Japanese has been widely used. Therefore, it is possible to input Japanese sounds using the Roman alphabet in the consonant separation keypad similar to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 and convert them to Japanese.あ, い, う, え, お can be written as a, i, u, e, o respectively.な, に, ぬ, ね, and の can be written as na, ni, nu, ne, and no, and the rest of the alphabet can also be written as a combination of Roman alphabet consonants and vowels.

In Japanese, two consecutive Roman alphabet consonants occur when a tactile sound or a consonant (in small letters) is used. In addition, when the Roman alphabet vowels appear consecutively, it is assumed that the combination of あ, い, う, え, お is not common in the word. It is rare. Therefore, the five vowels (a, i, u, e, o) of the Roman alphabet are divided into three groups similarly to Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, and assigned to three buttons and the vowels are entered by repeat selection. It can be seen that ambiguity does not occur much. In the case of Japanese, in particular, if “a” is entered, the corresponding Japanese is “あ”, and if “na” is entered, it is easy to see that the corresponding Japanese is “な” (the same is true for the rest of the Japanese alphabet). Therefore, as soon as the user enters “na” and the system confirms that the input value is “na”, the system can provide “な” to the user.                     

The Roman alphabet consonants used in the Japanese notation of the 50th phonogram are 14 of k, s, t, n, h, m, y, r, w, g, z, d, b and p. In the notation of today, two Roman alphabets can be expressed in combination (eg cha, sha), “y” in combination (eg kya), or “j”. Two or more Roman alphabet consonants occur in succession, such as ch, sh, ky, ny, hy, my, ry, gy, py, py, etc., and when a tactile sound is used. When the tactile sound is used, the same alphabet may appear consecutively among k, s, t, and p (eg ippai). Therefore, it can be seen that 16 (14 + c, j) roman alphabet consonants are essential for Japanese input. Thus, a consonant separation keypad can be configured to facilitate input of consonants essential for Japanese input. The remaining five Roman alphabets (f, l, q, v, x) will also be needed to enter English, but can be grouped around 16 alphabets. For example:

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / R / SZ / YW / => group into 9 groups

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / Y / SZ / RW / => group into 9 groups

BP / DT / GK / CJ / HR / MN / SZ / YW / => group into 8 groups

The five Roman alphabets required for English input can be added to each group as is the case for Chinese. In the case of grouping into eight groups, the remaining four buttons can be used as vowel buttons on the 3 * 4 keypad, or if only three vowel buttons are used, the other one can be used for consonants necessary for English input. .

12.5 Intentional Language Restriction

The language-limiting iterative selection method sacrifices the advantage of the "full-input method", which allows all words to be entered regardless of whether they exist in the dictionary, and whether or not the user will place these language restrictions. It is desirable to be able to set in advance. However, even in the "Language Restriction Input Mode", which enables a language-restricted input method, when a user wants to enter a word that does not exist in the dictionary and deviates from the word generation rule (alphabetic combination rule), a specific function (e.g., For example, the target alphabet may be intentionally determined by inputting a space and a left progression or ending of a word), and then all alphabet combinations may be input by inputting the next alphabet. For example, in FIG. 10-1, if the user inputs "622 ~" in the "English restricted input mode", the system recognizes "st ~" instead of "sdd ~", but if the user "sdd ~" If you want to enter "62", enter the space and left shift function and then enter "2" or "62" and then activate the "word termination function (or control to effect the word termination)". You can enter any other means you can and type "2". If the word termination function is activated after entering "62", the system recognizes "d" because "2" entered next comes out after "word start". This intentional input of the word termination function to overcome the language limitation in a specific language restriction input mode will be referred to as "intentional language restriction cancellation" for convenience. The example of "sdd ~" is "intentional English restriction".

Similarly, in FIG. 10-2, if the user does not exist as a Chinese pinyin in the "Chinese restriction input mode (applied to the Chinese restriction repetition selection method)", but wants to input "ui" which is a vowel combination existing in English, "u" is inputted. After input, re-enter the means for terminating the word (mentioned in the previous example), then type "i". Otherwise, press the button assigned "i" after "u" in "Chinese Restriction Input Mode (Applying Chinese Repetition Selection Method)" based on Fig. 10-2. (E.g., an alphabet with a "u" or an alphabet with a ".." over the "u"-if you want to enter "..u" as a variant of "u") (When using the Chinese Repetition Selection method, the button assigned with "i" is used as a control button when input after the vowel "u" and "o"). After all, the user can enter a combination of words (for example, all English combinations, such as English words) that do not exist in the Chinese pinyin even in the Chinese restricted input mode. In other words, a user who mainly uses Chinese can set all the alphabet combinations that do not exist in Chinese without changing the setting again while the Chinese restriction input mode is set to the Chinese restriction input mode. This is "intentional Chinese restriction release".

In the method using the three vowel elements of Korean in Figs. 4-5, the consonants or vowels as single letters can be equally applied. For example, in Figure 4-5, if you want to enter the consonant "a" and the vowel "ㅡ" as a single letter, enter [1] in the "word start" state, then enter the means for giving the word end function, Enter [*] again at the beginning of the word. This is because consecutive input of the [1] and [*] buttons results in a "g". In the standard keyboard (standard keyboard of English and Korean), when the right arrow button is pressed, the word termination function is activated without the "word ending" space being input. When the right arrow button is additionally provided in the present invention, the same applies. can do.

12.6 Language Unlock Delay

He said that "delay time delay" and "delay time delay" can be applied even when three or more letters are assigned to one button. For example, in the standard English keypad of FIG. 1-1, the battering delay time is set to 0.1 seconds, and when the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 seconds, the system can be regarded as inputting B.

Similarly, when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first and second input values (ie, the first [2] and second [2] buttons) If the delay time interval between them is within the time set as battering delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within time set as the batting delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) (i.e. [2] + less than 0.1 second + [2] + less than 0.1 second + [2]), C can be recognized by the system. Or when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]) and the total input time is within two times the batting delay time (eg 0.2 seconds), enter C You can also let the system know.

In addition, in the case of English, for example, assume that there is no "..u" in Fig. 10-1, and strictly apply the property that the English vowel "a" does not appear in succession, "i" does not appear in succession In this case, when inputting an abbreviation such as "NII", "NII" may be input in the English restriction repetition selection mode through "intentional English restriction release" by inputting the word termination function. However, after a certain period of time after entering "NI", NI can be confirmed even if the word termination function is not entered. This constant time may be set equal to the "other delay time" mentioned in the earlier application, but it may be desirable to set a longer time than the "other delay time". For example, if 2 seconds have elapsed after entering "NI", the NI will be confirmed and the system will return to the "Word Start" state even if the word termination function is not entered. For the sake of this convenience, it is called a "temporary language restriction delay time" and it may be desirable to allow the user to set it as well. It is obvious that this can be applied equally in all languages.

The various delay times are summarized as follows.

Battering delay time ≤ time delay ≤ temporary language restriction delay time

All three delays may be set to be the same, but it may be desirable to set a longer delay time than the batter delay time and a longer time limit for the temporary language release.

12.7 Portuguese Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Portuguese, k, w, and y are used only for abbreviations or foreign languages, but they will also be needed for text entry. In Portuguese, double consonants are said to be:

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, pl, tl,

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr, vr

In addition, there are multiple consonants such as gn, mn, pn, ps, pt, tm, ch, lh, nh, rr, and ss. Therefore, in constructing a consonant separation keypad for the Portuguese input method, it is necessary to prevent the above alphabets from being sequentially grouped into the same group. See, eg, Figure 10- *. However, "mn" is grouped into the same group, which can be modified and placed in another group. The keypad of Fig. 10- * can be similarly applied to other languages based on the similarity of pronunciation (e.g. voiced and unvoiced sounds with similar phonetic values-eg. / Bp /, / dt /, / gk /... This is because there are few cases in which alphabets with similar pronunciations appear consecutively.

In Portuguese, there are five vowels: a, e, i, o, and u, of which a, e, o are the vowels I and e are the weak vowels. When two different vowels appear in succession, the six vowels (ai, au, ei, eu, oi, ou) and the one (ui) of "weak vowel + weak vowel" are called. do. That is, the vowels and weak vowels may be grouped into separate groups (for example, there is no “.. + u” in FIGS. 10-6). In addition to the grouping, it is also possible to group in any number of groups so that the weak vowels and the vowels do not become the same group. For example, you can group like / a / eo / ui /.

12.8 How to Select Spanish-Loop Iterations on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Spanish, there is an alphabet that is not in English, with “~ + n (the letter with n above n)”. k and w are used only for the notation of foreign words, but they will also be needed for character entry. In Spanish, double consonants are said to be:

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, pl

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr

In other words, when constructing a consonant separation keypad for the Spanish constrained input method, it is necessary that l and r should not be assigned together, and the alphabets constituting the double consonants should not be assigned to the same button by grouping them into the same group. . Reference may be made to the consonant groupings of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 and FIGS. 10-6.

The Spanish vowels have five vowels a, e, i, o and u, of which a, e and o are the vowels I and e are the weak vowels. When two different vowels appear in succession, there are six kinds of “vowels + weak vowels”, six kinds of “weak vowels + strong vowels”, and two kinds of “weak vowels + weak vowels” (iu, ui). do. In the case of triple vowels, it is said to be combined as "weak vowel + strong vowel + weak vowel". That is, if the vowels and weak vowels are grouped into separate groups (for example, there is no “.. + u” in FIG. 10-6), only the case of the “weak vowels + weak vowels” becomes ambiguity. In this case, since both iu and ui are possible, ambiguity can be overcome by applying the battering delay time / iter delay time or by using the method proposed by the applicant such as intentional language restriction release. The same is true when the same vowels appear in succession, when the same consonants appear in succession, and when other ambiguities may occur.

12.9 Italian Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Italian, j, k, w, x, y are said to be used only for the notation of ancient or foreign language. You will need it for input such as English. In the grouping of consonants, the remaining consonants except for these five consonants may be grouped around, and the remaining five consonants may be appropriately grouped.

In Italian, the double vowels are said to be ia, io, ie, iu, ai, ei, oi, ui, uo, ou, eu. Also, except for iu and ui, it is a combination of strong vowels (a, e, o) and weak vowels (u, I). The triple vowels also have the structure of "weak vowel + strong vowel + weak vowel". Therefore, grouping of strong vowels and weak vowels such as / aeo / and / u I / can be used, and ui and iu can be ambiguous.

12.10 German Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

German consonants include ch, chs, ck, ds, dt, ng, nk, pf, ph, sch, sp, st, th, ts, tz and tsch. Also, the consonant grouping of FIG. 10- * may be referred to in grouping so that consecutive consonants are not grouped into the same group. In addition, in the case of "sch ~" in German is said to be three or more consonants in the dark, it can be utilized in the parallel input method described later. Tsch can also be dark, but it is used very rarely.                     

There are five short vowels in German, with the vowels “..” above a, o, u. The double vowels are au, ei, ai, eu, “..au”, ie, and so on. When entering a vowel using only short vowels (basic vowels), it is necessary to group i and e into different groups, as there are cases of ie and ei. For example, it can be grouped as / a e o /, / I u / and many variations are possible.

When the same consonants or vowels appear consecutively, ambiguity can be avoided by various methods suggested by the applicant.

12.11 Vietnamese Restrictions

12.11.1 Inputting Vietnamese Restrictions on the Consonant Separation Keypad

Vietnamese syllables are said to consist mainly of "vowels", "consonants + vowels", "vowels + consonants", and "consonants + vowels + consonants". In particular, Vietnamese is said to have a single syllable. Although evangelism is increasing, the large number of single syllables means that the input system is easy to configure on the alphabetic keypad.

In Vietnamese, there are five basic vowels: a, e, i (y), o, u and “v + a (vowel with a v on a. This is a vowel with 'x' on top of a vowel)”, “^ There are six variations of + a ”,“ ^ + o ”,“, + o ”, and“, + u ”. “Y” is said to pronounce “i” long. Only five basic vowels can be used to form a separate vowel keypad, and the rest of the vowels can be entered by the control method. You can compose a consonant split keypad with only a basic vowel and a side vowel, or you can configure a consonant split keypad with all 11 vowels.

Vietnamese double vowels and triple vowels have various combinations, so it is not easy to group five basic vowels into two or three groups similarly to those shown in FIG. There are also six tones in Vietnamese, and five tones appear above or below the vowel. And there is no case where the same vowels appear consecutively in Vietnamese, which is a useful property for entering Vietnamese vowels. Therefore, it is conceivable to put five basic vowels into five groups, input the vowels by the hidden repetition selection method, and attach the tonal symbols to the basic vowels and the vowels by the control processing method. Where y can be regarded as a variation of i. Vowel / 'a', 'v + a', '^ + a' / 'o', '^ + o', ', + o' / 'u', ', + u' / 'i', It is divided into five groups of 'y' / 'e' and '^ + e' /. By modifying this, it is also possible to combine the groups with a small number of vowels into four groups. For example, / 'a', 'v + a', '^ + a' / 'o', '^ + o', ', + o' / 'u', ', + u' / 'i', It is divided into four groups of 'y', 'e', and '^ + e' /. If you have only five groups, you can enter the vowel without ambiguity by applying the iterative selection method. Any alphabet in each group may be displayed on the keypad with a representative alphabet, and the rest of the alphabet may not be displayed. It would be natural to have a single vowel mainly be a representative alphabet, and in the case of dividing into four groups, it is possible to display both i and e. The selection order according to the number of button presses may be determined in consideration of the frequency of use.                     

Vietnamese consonants include "-+ d ('-' in the middle of 'd') which is not in English, and f, z, etc. are not used in English. '-+ D' is regarded as a variant of 'd' and can be applied to the (hidden) iterative selection method or control method. Some textbooks say that f, w, and z are not used in Vietnamese, and some textbooks say that w and j are used as half-consonants. At least f and z are not used, and w can be seen as rarely used. In the present invention, w is considered not to be used, but may be included in an appropriate group if necessary.

Also, there are ch, gh, gi, kh, ng, ngh, nh, ph, qu, th, tr, etc. Since gi and qu are morphological combinations of consonants and vowels, they are not considered here. Vietnamese is mainly composed of monosyllable syllables, which means that unlike other languages, syllables consisting of "ja + ma + ja" rarely occur continuously. Except for the above consonants, consonants and consonants appear continuously. It means that there are few cases. As a result, in applying the repeated selection method by dividing the consonants into several groups, if the consonants constituting the above consonants are grouped so as not to be grouped into the same group, the consonants can be input without ambiguity as in the case of Chinese.

For example, you can group into eight groups: b p / d t / g k / c q / s x / m n / l r / h v j. It can also be divided into six groups: b p v / d t / g k q / s x c / m n j / h l r / It would also be possible to group into arbitrary groups. Unused consonants, such as f, z, and the like, may additionally be included in the appropriate group.                     

By dividing the consonants into eight groups and dividing the vowels into four groups, both consonants and vowels can be accommodated within a 3 * 4 keypad. By dividing the consonants into six groups, by placing the vowels into five groups, you can accept the consonants and vowels from the eleven buttons, and use the other one as a control button for attaching tones to the vowels. By dividing the consonants into six groups and dividing the vowels into four groups, the ten number buttons can accommodate both the consonant buttons and the vowel buttons, which has the effect of making the simple codes consist of numbers only when using simple codes. . The other two buttons can be used as control buttons for entering the tonal code and subsequent control buttons for removing ambiguity.

12.11.2 Vietnamese Restriction Input Method Using Pairs of Consonants and Vowels

Vietnamese vowels and consonants can be grouped in pairs and repeated selection methods can be applied. See also Korean. If you have 10 consonant and vowel pairs, the rest of the consonant and vowel can be entered by the control method.

12.12 Russian Constraints Input Method for Keypad Separator

Applicant's prior application PCT / KR02 / 00247 may be referred to to form a consonant separating keypad for Russian.

There are 33 alphabets in Russian. Ten of them are vowels, 20 are consonants, one half vowel (or half consonant), and two symbolic alphabets (light consonants and soft consonants).

The following is an alphabetical listing of 33 uppercase and lowercase letters.

АБВГДЕЁЖЗИЙКЛМНОПРСТУФХЦЧШЩЪЫЬЭЮЯ

абвгдеёжзийклмнопрстуфхцчшщъыьэюя

The 20 consonants are divided into voiced and unvoiced consonants as follows. Parentheses mean pronunciation.

Vowels are divided into light vowels and soft vowels.

In proper grouping of Russian consonants, voiced and unvoiced sounds having similar voices can be grouped. For example, / б (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) /. To be classified as: Consonants that are not paired in pronunciation can be appropriately grouped as suggested in the earlier application. Some examples are as follows. Various variations are possible by grouping paired unvoiced and voiced sounds together.

10 groupings

Case 1: БП / ДТ / ГК / ВФ / ЗС / ЖШ / ЛР / МН / ХЦ / ЧЩ

Case 2: БВ / ГК / ДТ / ЖЗ / ЛР / МН / ПФ / СХ / ЦЧ / ШЩ

9 grouping cases: (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) / г (g) к (k) / в (v) ф (f) х (x) / з (z) с ( s) / ж (zh) ш (sh) / ц (ts) ч (tsh) щ (shsh) / л (l) р (r) / м (m) н (n)

Eight grouping examples: (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) / г (g) к (k) / в (v) ф (f) х (x) / з (z) с ( s) ж (zh) / ш (sh) ц (ts) ч (tsh) щ (shsh) / л (l) р (r) / м (m) н (n)

7 grouping cases:

. . . . . .

In the above example, the half consonant Й and the hard consonant code Ъ and the soft consonant code Ь may be included in an appropriate group. In addition, in order to keep the keypad concise in assigning such a group to each button, some alphabets (eg, Й, Ъ, Ь, and other alphabets) may be omitted and not displayed.

Vowels can also be grouped into five groups using ten vowels and soft vowels. There are 10 Russian vowel alphabets, and there are 11 vowel sounds in pronunciation, but there are 5 basic phonemes: (a), (e), (i), (o), and (u). Of these, (e) and (o) are said to appear only under stress. In other words, the vowel phonemes (a) and (o) can be seen as vowels. The vowel phonemes in the position without stress are said to be the remaining three. Therefore, it is possible to divide five basic alphabets among ten vowel alphabets in Russian, and to divide a vowel corresponding to a double vowel into one group and the other three basic vowels in one or more groups. This is because it can be expected that vowels of the same kind are difficult to come out in succession (eg, vowels in a row). For example, in two groups: а (a) о (o) / у (u) э (e) и (i) / or а (a) о (o) / у (u) э (e) / Can be divided into three groups, such as и (i) / The paired vowels corresponding to the basic collection can be placed in the group to which the basic collection belongs and the repetition selection method can be applied, or the control method can be applied considering the variation alphabet of the basic collection.

By using the groups of consonants and vowels properly, a consonant split keypad can be configured within a 3 * 4 keypad (eg 5 vowels and 7 consonants, 3 vowels and 9 consonants). In Russian, as in English, many consonants are contiguous (eg CCCVC ...), but the typical syllable structure is the repetitive structure of consonants and vowels (CV, CVCV, CVCVCV,…). This means that in most cases, it is possible to input Russian words without ambiguity (that is, with very little ambiguity) when the iterative selection method is applied in the alphabetic keypad.

12.13 Hindi Restriction Input Method on the Keyboard Separator

Applicant's prior application PCT / KR00 / 00601 showed a case of grouping the Hindi consonants into nine groups based on the similarity of pronunciation, and in the present invention, grouped into ten groups. Hindi also showed that group consonants with strong pronunciation similarities could be grouped into the same group. For example, in the previous figure, group consonants with pronunciations of (k), (kh), (g), and (gh) are grouped into one group. The same is true for the rest of the pseudophony groups. Of the 35 consonants presented above, 33 consonants can be arbitrarily grouped into 9 or 8 groups, except for the lowermost __ (ud) and __ (udh). __ (ud) and __ (udh) are considered variants of __ (d) and __ (dh), respectively, and can be placed in the group to which the basic alphabet belongs.

The following is a collection of Hindi described in the earlier application.

For convenience, the Hindi vowels are denoted in English pronunciation in parenthesis next to the underline (underlined by the Hindi alphabet of the pronunciation) or simply in English in parentheses. For convenience, __ (aa) is (a-), __ (ee) is (i-), __ (oo) is (o-), __ (ae) is (e), and __ (aae) is ( ai).

The vowel __ (ri) is also classified as a consonant. You can also group 10 vowels in groups of five, except for the vowel __ (ri), as shown above.

Hindi vowels are largely divided into (a), (i), and (u) short vowels and the long vowels of __ (a-), __ (i-), and __ (u-). The remaining four vowels are compound vowels. It can be represented by a combination of. I.e. __ (e) = (a) + (i) or (a) + (i-), __ (ai) = (a) + (e), __ (o) = (a) + (u) or ( a) + (u-), __ (au) = (a) + (o) Therefore, the basic vowels (a), (i), and (u) are divided into three groups, and each button is assigned to three buttons, and each button is used to input the basic vowel, and the long vowel corresponding to the basic vowel is assigned to the basic vowel. Enter two buttons and the remaining four compound vowels can be entered as a combination of the basic vowels.

For example, if (a), (i), and (u) are assigned to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, respectively, then __ (a-) = **, e = * 0 or * Enter 00. If ** 0 is pressed, the system recognizes __ (a-) when pressed to “**” but the next time “0” is pressed ** 0 is (a) + (e) = __ (ai) Can be recognized. Likewise, when ** # is pressed, the system recognizes __ (a-) when it is pressed up to “**”, but when the next “#” is pressed, ** # (a) + (o) = __ (au) Can be recognized.

This is possible if ten vowels in Hindi do not appear in succession in a word. Ambiguity may occur if the vowels of Hindi occur in succession. In other words, when you enter ** 0, you do not know whether you entered __ (a-) and __ (i) or __ (ai). However, even though 10 basic vowels may appear in succession, if the frequency is small, the system recognizes the input as a composite vowel by default if the composite vowel __ (ai) can be represented as ** 0. Language restrictions may apply. In this case, if the user wants to enter a combination of long vowels and __ (a-) and short vowels __ (i), they can be solved using "Intentional Unlimited Language Delay" or "Language Unlimited Delay Time". In this example, type **, activate the word termination function for a certain time, or intentionally, and then enter 0.

In Hindi, the main syllable structure consists of consonants and vowels alternately. If a consonant comes out after the consonant ends with a vertical line, the vertical line disappears and combines with the next consonant to form a combined consonant. Consonants without vertical lines are said to be combined with the next consonant, with a similar symbol "," below the alphabet. There are some other rules and some are irregular. When the consonants are recognized as being continuously input (temporarily recognized or deterministically recognized), it is easy to implement an automata that displays consonant consonants.

Even in countries where English is not the native language, English alphabets are used on the keypad to input English. Since India uses Hindi and English as official languages, it is possible to add naturalness to the use of simple codes and text input by assigning Hindi consonants and English consonants with similar pronunciation to the same button. For example, the following can be modified.

In the above, English consonants such as z, w, etc. may be added or added to an appropriate group as in the case of Chinese. Also, to simplify the arrangement on the keypad, only a part of the alphabets in each group may be displayed on the keypad (applied hidden repetition selection method). For example, in the above grouping, you can assign only __ (k) and __ (g) when assigning the first group to any button. The order to be selected in each group according to the number of button presses can be decided arbitrarily. You can also assign the collection __ (ri) to a button to which R L is assigned.

Again, to simplify the layout on the keypad, only English vowels (English alphabet vowels) can be written. As shown in the previous example, Hindi vowels have a strong pronunciation similarity with English vowels, so it is very natural to write only English vowels. Furthermore, in the case of consonants, / GK /, / MN /, / DT /, / BP /, / RL / with strong similarities in pronunciation, as shown in the contrast table for Hindi consonants and English vowels above. . . By displaying only the English consonants without omitting and displaying the Hindi consonants corresponding to the groups, the keypad can be more concise. Of course, even in the case where the Hindi alphabet is omitted, in the Chinese example, as in the Chinese restricted input mode, the pinyin can be input without ambiguity, in the Hindi restricted input mode, Hindi is inputted without ambiguity according to the Hindi limited.

12.14 How to Enter Language Restrictions on the Half Consonant Separation Keypad

Half-consonants (i.e. half vowels) are slightly different for each language. In English, w, y, j, etc. are generally treated as semi-consonants. Some languages exclude j, others contain v, etc. do. In general, w and y seem to be treated as half consonants in most languages.

Since the half consonants have similar properties and phonetic properties to the vowels, it is an extension of grouping the consonants based on the similarity of the pronunciation.

In addition, there are alphabets that are not used in certain languages among English alphabets (for example, k and w which are used only in foreign languages in Spanish), and alphabets other than English alphabets (applicants are called modified alphabets or additional alphabets for convenience). This is also used. Unused alphabets in English alphabets will also be needed for common English input. So if you don't have a lot of Roman alphabets that aren't used in a particular language, you can group them with half consonants and assign them to the same button. See Figures 10-6 in Chinese.                     

You can also group alphabets that are not used in a particular language together and assign them to the same button.

12.15 Language Constraints on the Incomplete Consonant Separation Keypad

In the present invention, it has been shown that the ambiguity can be removed or minimized by constructing a consonant separation keypad optimized for each language and applying a repetitive selection method. In addition, by configuring the consonant separation keypad in this way, it is possible to simplify the algorithm of the input system. It is obvious that various modifications are possible based on this. Therefore, the case of assigning a consonant to some buttons by slightly modifying it is also a modified category of the language restriction input method in the consonant separation keypad proposed in the present invention. This is called "incomplete consonant separation keypad" for convenience, and the button assigned with the consonant is called "consonant mixing button" for convenience.

For example, the vowel “i” and the (half) consonant “y” are grouped together on the consonant separator keypad, assigned to a specific button, and the consonants (in this case half consonants) and vowels are selected in a predetermined order according to the number of button presses. (The remaining buttons are separated into consonant buttons and vowel buttons). If there are no consecutive words such as “iy” or “yi”, it is possible to input Chinese pinyin without ambiguity by applying Chinese restriction input method. In this case, it is assumed that the consonants are selected in the order of “y” (one press) and “i” (two presses) according to the number of presses of the specified button. As soon as it is pressed once, the input of the previous consonant button is confirmed to have entered the consonant, so the system does not regard that the consonant mixing button is pressed once, but “y” is temporarily entered, and the vowel “i” is entered. Can be confirmed. This is because, in Chinese, you can use language restrictions that prevent the consonant “y” after a certain consonant.

For another example, you can group vowels “i” and consonants “j” or vowels “i” and consonants “k” into the same group and apply the repetition selection method. When entering Chinese Pinyin “…” ik… " or "… ki… Ambiguity can occur if there are consecutive occurrences, such as. Assigning consonants and vowels to some of these buttons for no particular reason, complicates the input algorithm, reduces the efficiency of the input system configuration, and is worse than applying a language-limited input method on a full consonant split keypad. . However, due to the characteristics of each language, a consonant mixing button may be placed on some buttons for a special purpose such as assigning consonants to all ten number buttons (see Korean example).

This can be applied by modifying the flowchart of FIGS. 10-7. See Figs. 10-9. The same is true when there is more than one consonant mixing button, and the same case when two or more consonants are assigned to one consonant mixing button. Applying language restrictions on an incomplete vowel separation keypad is a bit more complicated (see examples of “i” and “y” above), and the consonant and vowel combination rules for each language must be applied, so that each language Flowcharts that apply the restrictions in detail can be more complex than FIGS. 10-9. 10-9 may be considered to be a very simplified representation of only some general content of FIG. 10-7.                     

For example, when entering the Chinese Pinyin in the standard English keypad of Fig. 5-1, since five vowels are assigned to different buttons, the vowels can be recognized without ambiguity. In the case of consonants, a consonant followed by "~ vowel + n" can be recognized without ambiguity. When "~ vowel + n + m" is entered in "~ n + X" ('X' is the English consonant), the vowel "o" assigned to the [6] button is combined. When a possible vowel (for example vowel 'a') comes, it can be temporarily recognized as "~ ao". However, since the normal Chinese Pinyin syllable does not end with "m", the previous input value can be recognized as "~ anm + vowel" by looking at the vowel recognized by the next input value. If "a" is followed by a vowel that cannot be combined (e.g. "e"), then "n + m = 666" is entered. can be treated as "~ enm ~" (since '~ emn ~' is not possible in Chinese Pinyin).

Ambiguity can occur when a consonant follows a syllable ending in "~ vowel + ng". For example, "~ ngg ~" can be recognized as "~ nh ~". In Chinese, the system can search the index for all Chinese characters matching "~ ngg ~" and "~ nh ~" and provide them to the user. In case of "~ ngh + collection ~", it can be recognized as "~ ni + collection". If the recognized vowel is a vowel that cannot be combined after "i" (for example, 'u'), the input can be recognized as "~ nghu", but otherwise "~ ngh + collection ~" and " You can search for and process kanji corresponding to all ~ ni + vowels ~ ". In addition, when some ambiguity occurs, all words matching the possible analysis results may be searched and provided to the user.                     

In the case of inputting Chinese Pinyin by applying the Chinese restriction repetition selection method in the standard English keypad of FIG. 1-1, “~ ngh + vowel ~” may be recognized as “~ ni + vowel”. The phrases can be searched and processed in Pinyin index. If all of the full codes (full codes in the iterative selection method based on Fig. 1-1) are stored in the Pinyin index, all cases in which the input value can be generated (ex. By searching the index for “~ ngh + vowels” and “~ ni + vowels”, the system can identify matching phrases.

For example, when the repetition selection method is applied in FIGS. 1-1 and 5-1, “222” may be recognized as “aaa”, “ab”, “ba”, and “c”. Accordingly, "beijing = 22334445444664" in FIGS. 1-1 and 5-1, where a consecutive number group can be recognized as a plurality of alphabet combinations. Consecutive groups of numbers “22 ~” can be interpreted as “aa” or “b”. “~ 33 ~” can be interpreted as “dd” or “e”. Thus, “2233 ~” can be interpreted as four kinds of “aadd ~”, “aae ~”, “bdd ~” or “be ~”. As the input increases, the number of possible combinations increases exponentially. This alphabetic interpretation of input values is also called "alphabetic combination" or "candidate alphabetic combination" for convenience.

However, when “22 ~” is pressed, it can be interpreted as “aa ~” or “b ~”. If the system checks that the word starting with “aa ~” is no longer in the index by referring to the index, For example, the system can treat inputs “22 ~” as “b ~”, except for combinations that begin with “aa ~”. This can be seen as analogous to the interpretation of the input “22 ~” as “b ~” using a Chinese restriction where the Chinese Pinyin does not start with “aa ~”. Thus, when “2233 ~” is pressed, the index is searched for only the two combinations of “bdd ~” and “be ~”, where again the phrase starting with “bdd ~” no longer exists in the index. If the system confirms, the combination starting with "bdd ~" is not considered anymore, and only "be ~" is processed according to the next input value. Similarly, in Chinese Pinyin, it is similar to treating “input value“ 2233 ~ ”as“ be ~ ”using Chinese restriction that“ bdd ~ ”is not possible. It can be interpreted as “beg ~” for the input value “22334 ~”. It can also be interpreted as “begg ~” or “beh ~” for the input value “223344 ~”. When the pinyin index is searched and the word starting with “begg ~” is no longer present, the system enters it. The value “223344 ~” will be treated as “beh ~”. This can be seen as similar to using the Chinese Restriction input method (eg, input method using Chinese Restriction where “begg ~” is not valid syllable and only “beh ~” is valid syllable syllable according to Chinese Pinyin generation rule). When “4” is pressed once more and the input value becomes “2233444 ~”, it can be interpreted as “behg ~” or “bei ~”, and the word starting with “behg ~” no longer exists after searching the index. As soon as the system confirms that it does not, the input value can be treated as “bei ~”. This is a Pinyin combination that “behg ~” is impossible in the Chinese restricted input method, so the input value “2233444 ~” is interpreted as “bei ~”. Similar to processing.                     

In a system that stores all the words you want to enter and the full code, there are simply 2 * 2 * 4 * 1 * 4 * 2 * 1 = 128 possible candidates for "beijing = 22334445444664". Of course, it is also within the scope of the present invention that all 128 candidate alphabet combinations are compared to the index and processed only for matching words. However, in systems where the system can recognize the input value from the beginning of the input, input an alphabetic combination ('aa ~', 'bdd ~', behg ~ ', etc.) that does not exist in the index as the input value increases. An early out method may be useful.

The system can search for only some candidate alphabet combinations present in the index among a large number of candidate alphabet combinations that occur as the same input value in the iterative selection method continuously increases. If it is confirmed that none of the candidate alphabetic combinations by input value exist in the index, the system can treat the input value as a simple code of the promised type.

12.16 Application of hidden control methods

In the above consonant separation keypad, select any button (button on the 3 * 4 keypad or external button) as the control button, select only the representative alphabet as one button, and input the remaining alphabet by the control processing method. Can be. For example, “w, y, v” assigned to the [0] button on the keypad of FIG. 10-6 is assigned to an arbitrary consonant button, and the [0] button is used as a control button, so that “p = b + 0 = 10 ”(if input is applied after control). This is already mentioned in the earlier application.

13. Parallel input method judged by length of input value

The length of the shortcode stored in the index may be less than a certain number in some cases. Also, in certain cases, the type of shortcode entered by the user or by the system (e.g., Type 1 (city name), Type 2 (bank name),... Can be designated). If the type of the shortcode inputted as Type 1 (city name) is specified and the length of the shortcode of the city name is 3 or less, the length of the input value is 3 when the parallel input method using the shortcut input method as the default mode is applied. The moment it exceeds, the system treats the input as a full code. Conversely, when applying the full-priority parallel input method, if three input values are input and the word termination function (eg blank) is input, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

This may be particularly useful when the length of a shortcode of a certain type (city name? 北京, company name? 四通 集團,...), Such as Korean or Chinese, can be less than a certain length. Since nouns often consist of less than a certain number of syllables, and it is natural to use a syllable-based initial code short code, for example, most bank names in Korean are composed of two syllables. Will be 2).

This means that it is not necessary to determine whether the input value is a short code or a full code at the initial stage of input, so that it is not necessary to provide it to the user. This may be useful if In other words, instead of searching the shortcode index every time an input value is input, it only needs to check whether the input value is longer than a certain length, thereby simplifying the implementation and improving the performance of the system.

14. Parallel language input method

The language restriction parallel input method applies the full priority parallel input method at the moment when the input value violates the "word generation rule" of a specific language (i.e., violates the language restriction), and the system regards the input value as a simple code. To deal with. If it is confirmed that the value matching the input value no longer exists in the simple code index, the input value can be regarded as full code again and processed.

14.1 Language Restriction Parallel Input Method Using Language Repetition Selection Method as Full Input Method

14.1.1 Chinese

In particular, syllable-based initial codes of Chinese based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 have only numerical values of [1] to [9], which are consonant buttons (even when a collection of a, o, and e are used alone). If the vowels i, u, ..u are used alone, they are preceded by y, w, y respectively). In the example of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the full code to which the repetition selection method is applied is the second or at least third input value in one of the [*], [0] or [#] buttons for vowel input. Should be entered. This property provides a good property to know whether the input value is full code at the beginning of the input when applying the "parallel input method" as mentioned in the Korean example of the previous application (method using the collection element). do.

For example, in the parallel input method (full priority parallel input method) using the iterative selection method based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 as the pull input method and the pull input mode as the default input mode, If "693 ... = shk ..." is entered, the input value does not achieve full code at the moment the third value [3] is entered (up to 'sh' but the next consonant 'k' Is recognized by the system, so the system can treat the input as a simple code. Again “112… = pd… Is entered, the input value does not form a full code at the moment when the third input value [2] is inputted (in Chinese input, '11' cannot be 'bb' and can only be interpreted as 'p', If p is followed by a roman alphabet consonant d or t, the system can recognize Chinese syllables) and the system can treat the input as a simple code. Similarly, “7771… = wb… Is entered, the system can regard the input value as a simple code and process it as soon as the fourth input value [1] is entered. After all, in most cases, when a second or third input is entered, the system knows whether the input is full code or not.

“14…. = bj… ”Is input, the system recognizes that the input does not form a valid Chinese syllable at the moment the second input value [4] is entered (since no Roman alphabet consonants are combined, such as bj in the Chinese Our Lady). You can treat the value as a simple code. That is, in FIG. 10-5, the system may provide the user with the phrase “Bejing” or “北京”, which is a corresponding phrase of the simple code “14”. If there is no simple code starting with "14" or "14" in the index of the simple code, the system will treat the input as full code again and provide the user with "bj".

This is the same as in the case of Korean using vowel elements (Fig. 4-5). The full input method in FIG. 4-5 described above can be regarded as a Korean limited iterative selection method. When the full priority parallel input method is applied, if “12” is input, the input value does not form a valid Korean syllable. The input value is regarded as a simple code, and a phrase corresponding to the simple code is provided to the user by referring to the simple code index. However, if it is confirmed that the simple code corresponding to “12” no longer exists in the simple code index, the system considers the input value as full code again and provides the user with “ㄱ”.

For simplicity, the simple codes are shown in a sorted state in the simple code indexes of FIGS. 5-4 and 10-5. However, the simple codes may be stored in any form within the system. You can sort simplecodes to check whether input values no longer exist in the simplecode index.

In addition, a parallel input method using the short input mode (assuming that only syllable-based initial codes consisting of [1] to [9] is stored in the simple code index to be searched as shown in Fig. 10-1) as the default input mode ( In the short-priority parallel input method), when the second value [*] is input from the input value "1 * ...", the system can recognize and process the input value as a full code without searching the simple code index. . This is also the same as in the case of Korean in Figures 5-4.

In Figs. 5-4 and 10-5, the pinyin / kanji index and the simple code index are described as one index. However, as shown in Fig. 5-1, there is a Pinyin / Chinese index (simply called "Pinyin index". An index storing "Pinyin + Pinyin-compatible Chinese"-for searching a corresponding Chinese character from the input Pinyin), and also a simple code It is obvious that the pinyin index (simply referred to as the "simple chord index", "simple chord + simple chord corresponding pinyin + Chinese to pinyin" or "simple chord + simple chord corresponding pinyin") may be separately placed.

5-4 and 10-5, it is not necessary to store only syllable-based initial codes in the simple code index, and other types of simple codes may be stored together, such as consonant-based initial codes. Similarly, depending on the type of simple code, the syllable-based initial code index, the consonant-based initial code index, and the overall associated simple code index may be implemented with each index.

As shown in Fig. 10-10, it is assumed that there are syllable reference initial codes "14", consonant reference simple codes "1473", and the overall associated simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" for "北京". In the case of applying the Chinese restricted full priority parallel input method on the keypad of Figs. 10-10, in the case of the syllable-based initial code "14" and the consonant-based simple code "1473", when the second input value "7" is pressed, the system enters the input value. Can be regarded as simple code and can be processed by searching the index. However, in the case of the totally associated simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" of "beijing", when the input value "1 * # 4 ..." is interpreted as full code, it becomes "baiz ...", and "1 * Up to # 4 "does not violate the Pinyin creation rule. However, "baiz ..." (and "baij ..."-since it may be "baij ..." according to the next input value) is not the pinyin present in the pinyin index of Figs. Therefore, the system interprets the input value as full code according to each input value, and input values are "b ... => ba ... => bai ... => baiz ..." Each time it recognizes, the pinyin index is searched for a matching phrase. As can be seen from Fig. 10-10, a matching pinyin can be found up to "bai ~", but as soon as the input is recognized as "baiz ~" (and potentially "baij ~"), the system no longer matches the pinyin index. It can be confirmed that there is no (see Fig. 10-10 (1)). Therefore, the input value "1 * # 4 ..." up to "baiz ~" can be regarded as a simple code, and a matching phrase can be found by referring to the simple code index (Fig. 10-11 (2)-(A ), (2)-(B)). Here, even if the simple code index cannot find a phrase that matches the input value "1 * # 4 # ...", the system can again treat the input value as a full code and treat it as "bai ...".

Due to the peculiarity of the Chinese character, all pinyin and kanji indices (Pinyin / Hanja index) must be stored in the system. It means to treat as simple code. This can be seen in the same context as processing the input value as a simple code when the system recognizes that the input value is not full code.                     

When different types of simple codes exist for the same word, it is possible to have the simple codes in one form of multiple catalogs for one pinyin as shown in FIGS. 10-10 or 10-11. In processing by considering an input value as a simple code (that is, processing by considering an input value as an abbreviated input), the processing of (2)-(A) or (2)-(B) in Fig. 10-11 is optional. Is possible. By using the processing in Figs. 10-11 (2)-(B), it is not necessary to have a simple code in the index. The process of (2)-(B) is to find the matching pinyin by comparing the pinyin of the index with the combination of pinyin that can be achieved by each input. The combination of pinyin that an input can achieve is assigned to the [1] button by two alphabetical letters, and by the [*] button to three alphabetical letters. It is easy to see that six combinations (= 2x3) are possible. This is called "simple code possible alphabet combination" or "possible alphabet combination" for convenience. Since two alphabets are assigned to the [#] button in FIGS. 10-11, 12 combinations will be possible when pressed to "1 * #", and 24 combinations will be possible when pressed to "1 * # 4". However, since no pinyin begins with "poi ..." in the actual Chinese Pinyin dictionary when implemented in the system, the combination below "poi ..." can be excluded from consideration. That is, "poiz ..." and "poij ..." which are combinations of "poi ..." or less with respect to the input value "1 * # 4" can also be excluded. Likewise, you can search for Pinyin that matches the input, excluding not only "poi ..." but also combinations that do not exist in the Pinyin index.

Using the process of Figs. 10-11 (2)-(A) should have a simple code in the index, but can also handle the case where an irregularly defined simple code is used. Using the processing of (2)-(B) does not require storing the simple code in the index, but requires the premise that a simple code with a certain rule (for example, a totally associated simple code) is entered and the system It is necessary to know in advance the type of simple code (for example, the total associated simple code).

Due to the peculiarity of Chinese, which must have an index of all Pinyin / Chinese characters that you want to input, when the value interpreted as full code does not exist in the index as shown in FIGS. Can be regarded as a shortened input value). When applying the parallel priority input method, FIGS. 10-12 illustrate a procedure generally applicable to Chinese input. This may be equally applicable to a syllable-based initial code or a full-priority parallel input method using consonant-based simple codes. For example, if a syllable-based initial code is entered, the system interprets it as a full code and searches for the pinyin index. In most cases, the second or third input value is no longer present in the pinyin index. This is because the system can recognize that. 10-13 show that a procedure of checking whether an input value constitutes a valid Pinyin syllable is added before searching for the Pinyin index using the Chinese language features.

In the input system not only in Chinese but also in other languages, when the system stores the index of all words to be input, similarly as in the procedures of FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, one input value is inputted. Each time, it is possible to interpret the input as a full code, search for words in the index to see if they match, and if the matching word no longer exists, treat the input as a shortcode.

14.1.2 English, etc.

If it is recognized that the fourth consonant is entered from the beginning of the first word starting with "st ~" or "sp ~", and the third consonant from the beginning of the first word without starting with "st ~" or "sp ~". The moment the input is recognized as input, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

For example, the simple repetition selection method is applied on the keypad of Fig. 1-1, and when the input value of the third input value [7] is entered, “467 ... = gms…” is inputted, the input value of the word generation rule of English Because of the violation, the system can treat the input value as a simple code. If the simple code index stores the entire associated simple code “4678255 = install”, the system can provide the user with the simple code equivalent of install. The simple code index of the search range indicates “467…”. If no simple code matches ", the input can be treated as a full code again.

As described above, when the English Repetition Selection Method is used as a full input method in the alphabetic keypad, the input value does not start with English input rules (eg, "st ~" or "sp ~" from the beginning of a word). Since it is easy to know whether three consonants cannot come), the parallel input method can be applied more efficiently.

14.2 Language Restriction Parallel Input Method Using Full Input Method as Control Method Excluding Representative Alphabet

In Fig. 1-1, when the first alphabet of each button is input as the corresponding alphabet by one button and the remaining alphabet is input by the control processing method (that is, the control processing method except the representative alphabet is applied), the word generation described above in English is generated. By using the rules, a language-limited parallel input method can be applied that treats the input value as a simple code when the word generation rule is violated.

For example, in Fig. 1-1, when the first alphabet is represented as the representative alphabet and the remaining alphabet is input by the control processing method, the moment when the third input value [7] is inputted when “467 ... = gms…” is input. Because the input value violates the English word generation rule, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

Similarly, it can be applied similarly to languages other than English, and the rest are similar to those of the language restriction parallel input method using the repeated selection method as a full input method.

14.3 Overcoming Third-order Ambiguity in Language-Restricted Parallel Input Methods

In case of inputting the simple code “72673” of “scope”, if the system first recognizes it as full code, it becomes “72673 = pampd” and the input value does not violate the English word generation rule. The input value is first recognized as a full code, and secondly, the input value is interpreted as a simple code and a "third ambiguity" is generated, which is also recognized as a scope corresponding to the simple code. In this case, the simple repetition selection method is applied based on FIG. 1-1 as the pull input method.

In this case, the system will first provide pampd to the user. However, if the user wants to enter the scope, the user can select the scope by pressing a specific button (for example, the arrow [v] button below). Or, if the word input is terminated after inputting "72673" (for example, if a space is entered), the user inputs "pampd" which interprets the input value as full code and "scope" which is interpreted as simple code. You can provide it as a list and let the user make a choice.

The above case can be similarly applied to the parallel input method in which the control processing method other than the representative alphabet is used as the full input method. In addition, in the short-priority parallel input method, which is not a full-priority parallel input method, even if an input value exists in the simple code index at the end of a word after inputting the input value, the language restriction is violated when the input value is regarded as a full code. If not (when tertiary ambiguity occurs), the user can be made to select (press a specific button repeatedly or select from a list).

The same applies to languages other than English (particularly in the case of Japanese which applies the control method except the representative alphabet).

In order to select one of a plurality of candidates, a target phrase may be selected from candidate phrases output by the system by using an arbitrary button which is not frequently used among the movement buttons. It has already been explained that this can be applied to all cases where ambiguity occurs as well as when third ambiguity occurs.

15. Parallel input method using a string that violates language restrictions

Input values (full code or simple code) can be interpreted on the client side or on the server side. Fig. 11-1 and Fig. 11-2 are diagrams of prior applications showing the case of analysis on the client side and the case of analysis on the server side, respectively. In other words, simply "system" encompasses both client-side and server-side systems. If the input value is a simple code, the client side interprets the simple code and transmits a simple code corresponding phrase as a text to the server side. Similarly, when the input value is transmitted to the server side as a number and analyzed on the server side, the simple code may be interpreted on the server side and used for various services. The client side sends DTMF tones and receives these inputs from the server, which is one of the cases in which numeric values are transmitted from the client side to the server side.

In the parallel language input method, the input value violates the language restriction (that is, the input value does not constitute a valid syllable of a specific language), and the system treats the input value as a simple code, but the input value is entered in the index of the simple code. There may not be a simple code that matches. In this case, the input value is regarded as full code again. For example, the user inputs "7799" with "Samsung Electronics" in mind with reference to Figs. 4-5, and "Samsung Electronics" corresponding to "7799" and "7799" in the simple code index in the client-side system. If you do not save the file, the system simply assumes "ㅅㅅㅈ" as entered by the user. In the case of the securities information system, if the client sends the input value "7799" to the server side, or sends the Samsung Electronics corresponding to the input value "7799" to the server side, the stock information server can interpret "7799". There will be no problem (assuming that the stock information server has the simple code "7799" and the simple code corresponding phrase "Samsung Electronics"). However, in the character input mode on the client side, the user inputs "7799" and treats the input value as a simple code on the client side. Since "7799" does not exist in the client-side simple code index, it is regarded as full code again. When the string "ㅅㅅㅈ" is sent to the server side, it becomes difficult to utilize it in the stock information server.

Therefore, if the transmitted string "ㅅㅅㅈ" is not a meaningful value, the securities information server extracts "7799" used to enter "ㅅㅅㅈ", and traces the corresponding phrase "Samsung Electronics" of the simple code "7799". This can be used in the system. Alternatively, if you use the syllable-based initial code as a simple code in Korean, the system tracks the "Samsung Electronics" that match the first consonant of the syllable with "ㅅㅅㅈ" among the simple code counterparts. Can provide services.

The same can be applied to a PC environment using a keyboard rather than a keypad. In other words, in the stock information system using the PC as a client, the user had to input "Samsung Electronics" to search the stock price of "Samsung Electronics". Recognize that "ㅅㅅㅈ" does not exist in the listed company name as a list of single letters, and after extracting the two methods described above ("7799", "Samsung" tracking, or "ㅅㅅㅈ" and the first consonant of syllables " Samsung Electronics "tracking) can provide services.

Another method is to register “7799 (Simple Code), Samsung Electronics (Simple Code Correspondence)” as well as “ㅅㅅㅈ” (conventionally called “Simple Code Correspondence”) ”in the server side index. It can be confirmed that the value “ㅅㅅㅈ” does not form a valid Korean syllable and that the user intends to “Samsung” by comparing the stored simple code corresponding character.

Fig. 11-3 summarizes the above contents, and (A), (B), and (C) can be selectively performed.

Furthermore, even when a character such as a character is input from a client such as a PC through a device such as a keyboard (for example, a character is input using a PC word processor, etc.), the syllable-based initial code is used. By inputting only the first consonant of a syllable, and converting it into a target phrase in a system (client or server), it is possible to input text at high speed or to utilize it in various information systems. For example, if a user wants to enter “Samsung”, and the user enters “ㅅㅅㅈ”, the system may search the index and provide the user with “Samsung” with the first consonant “ㅅㅅㅈ”. Other methods described above (such as extracting simple codes and indexing of input values based on a specified specific keypad and storing simple code corresponding characters in an index) are also applicable. See FIG. 11-5. (A), (B) and (C) are optionally possible.

Up to now, in the registered and inputting a commercial phrase, simply specifying a combination of special function buttons and number buttons, regardless of the relationship with the phrase. For example, "Samsung Electronics" is registered as a commercial phrase, "alt + 1" to be entered.

Similarly, the syllable criteria of “四通 集團 (satongjipdan: Korean pronunciation is regarded as Chinese Pinyin for convenience because applicant does not know Chinese pronunciation, but can be similarly applied to Chinese pronunciation)” based on Fig. 10-2. The initial code is “6242” corresponding to s, t, j, d. When the user enters "6242", if 6242 and satongjipdan are not registered in the simple code index of the client side system, the client side system only provides "sdzd" to the user. When the user sends “sdzd” to the server side, since “sdzd” does not form a valid Chinese syllable on the server side, the user inputs the input value “6242” from “sdzd” and extracts a simple code (here, syllable-based initial code). ) It is possible to search for "四通 集團" corresponding to "6242" (assuming that the server-side system stores the simple code and the corresponding phrase).

In the case of Korean, “sdzd” and other consonant combinations that can be modified based on Fig. 10-2, such as searching for “ㅅㅅㅈ” and a phrase matching the first consonant of the alphabet assigned with each consonant, Eg, “xdjd”, “stjt”, “sdjt”,… if 16) and the first consonant of each syllable can be provided to the user.

Also, the simple code corresponding character “sdzd” is stored on the server side, and the value “sdzd” transmitted from the client side does not form valid Chinese syllables. The system can find out what is "四通 集團".

Fig. 11-4 shows the above contents, and (A), (B), and (C) are optionally available.

The processing in Figs. 11-3 and 11-4 may be performed on the server side or on the client side.

Not only a device equipped with a keypad but also an information communication device such as a PC may search for and provide a word (“四通 集團”) that matches the first consonant of a syllable of Chinese Pinyin when the user inputs “stjd”. Alternatively, when the user inputs “stjd”, the system (eg PC) registers a short code (simple code corresponding character) as the first consonant “stjd” of each syllable, and violates the Chinese language restriction when the second consonant is input. Two roman alphabets, not sh, ch, zh, etc. appear, so the input value can be regarded as a shortcut input value (the user regards it as a shortcut input). Extracting the simple code from the input value “stjd” may extract the simple code (eg 6242) by means of a keypad (eg 10-2) which has been promised in advance. 11-6, (A), (B), and (C) are optionally possible.

 11-6 (B) shows words that the input value generates and do not produce valid Pinyin syllables (in this example, "stjd" as the syllable-based initial value) and the first alphabet of each syllable of the phrase stored in the index ( "sa-tong-jip-dan => stjd") to find a matching phrase. It can be seen that the syllable reference initial value is used as the shortened input value. In the keypad of Fig. 10- *, the syllable reference initial value corresponding to &quot; stjd " is " 622442 ". As can be easily seen from Fig. 11-6, (B) does not have a simple code index, it is possible to simply have a pinyin index for input of Chinese characters. Similarly, even when "consonant reference input value" is used as an input value, the system can search for a phrase in which the word (string) generated by the input value matches the consonant of the phrase stored in the index.

In summary, the type of the input value inputted by the abbreviation, which is recognized regularly, is similar to the simple code type of "syllable-based initial value" (for example, "beijing's syllable-based initial value is" 144 = bj "). ), "Consonant reference input value" ("beijing" consonant reference input value is "144773 = bjng"), "first vowel + syllable reference initial value", "word reference initial value", and so on. In this case, the input value is regarded as a shorthand input value and processed as soon as the input value violates the language restriction.

The types of "shortened input values" presented so far are shown in the tables of FIGS. 11-11. In Fig. 11-11, the shortcut input value (A) covers (B) to (L), which shows the types of the shortcut input values that the system can recognize according to certain rules. Also included are some associative simple codes defined in relation to any partial alphabet and shortened input values consisting of any arbitrary alphabet only. It can be seen that the "total input value" (Z) is the full code of the full input method.                     

If a certain condition (for example, the input value violates the full code generation rule, or fails to form a valid syllable of a specific language) as described above, the input value is regarded as a shorthand input value and processed. (I.e., the processing is regarded as not being the full code of the promised full input method.) Since this is the core content of the parallel input method, even if a shortened input value not provided in the present invention is used, the parallel input method of the present invention is used. It is obvious that it is included in the category of. In the table of Figs. 11-11, the short axis input values (H) to (L) can be used not only in the device having a keypad but also in a device such as a PC as shown in Figs. 11-5 and 11-6. 11-6 (B) shows an example in which "syllable reference initial value" is used as a shortened input value. The term simple code or short code is used as a short term input value. The short input value of (H) ~ (L) can also be regarded as a simple code with a comprehensive meaning. That is, (I) "syllable reference initial value" in FIGS. 11-11 may be referred to as "syllable reference initial value simple code", and the shortened input values of (H) to (L) may be named as well.

In FIG. 10- *, if "14 = bz" is input as a syllable initial value, the system will search for a phrase in the index that matches "bz" and the consonant of each syllable. Here, if you enter "4" again, "144 = bj", you will search the index for phrases that match "bj" and the first consonant of each syllable (for example, "beijing").

According to the present invention, it is further shown that when any one of the shortcut input values exemplified above is input, it can be interpreted as various types of shortcut input values. For example, a single abbreviated input value is first processed as a predetermined shortened input value (for example, a syllable reference initial value), and is processed secondly as another shortened input value (for example, a consonant reference input value). It is considered to be regarded as), and it is considered to process thirdly as another shortened input value, and it is presented that one shortened input value can be interpreted as several types of shortened input values. Referring to FIG. 10- *, if the shortened input value "144 = bj" is input, the system first searches the index for the phrase ("beijing") that matches "bj" and the first alphabet of each syllable. In addition, regardless of whether there is a primary search result or not, the phrase that matches the consonant in the index can be searched secondarily.

This shows that the system can interpret any input of shortened input values shown in Figs. 11-11. By applying this, there may be a plurality of search results for one short input value, and the output priority may be applied according to the type of the short input value applied. For example, first, the phrase (s) retrieved by interpreting the syllable reference initial value is first interpreted as the consonant reference input value, and then the retrieved phrase (s) is outputted next. If a user mainly uses the syllable-based initial value as the short-term input value, it may be desirable to set the phrase (s) interpreted by the syllable-based initial value to be primarily output. Therefore, it is desirable to allow the user to specify the priority according to the type of the shortcut input value. In addition, if a user wants to use only the consonant initial value, it may be desirable to set the shortened input value to be interpreted only as the consonant initial value. The output priority of the phrases obtained by interpreting the same type of short input value may be determined by factors such as frequency of use, as mentioned above. In addition, the output priority may be determined according to the frequency of use of each of the retrieved phrases regardless of the abbreviated input type applied to the abbreviated input value analysis.

In the case of "jinzhi (禁止) and zhuijian (逐 ㅇ), the initial syllable-based initial values are" jz "and" zj ", respectively," 444 ". In this case, when the full-priority parallel input method is applied, the third input value is" 4 ". As soon as "" is input, the system can recognize that the input value is not the syllable syllable. The syllable-based initial value is based on Fig. 10- *. In other words, for the shorthand input value "444", the phrases in which each syllable matches "jz" should be searched for all the phrases matching "zj".

Similarly, when the shortcut priority parallel input method is applied, the input value can be regarded and processed as the shortcut input values in FIGS. 11-11 (B) to (L). In addition, the input value is first treated as a syllable reference initial value, and the second value is regarded as a syllable reference initial code, and the third value is regarded as a consonant reference initial value. It is possible to do As soon as the input value is treated as a shorthand input and it is confirmed that no more matching words exist in the index, the system treats the input value as a full code. It may be desirable to allow the user to specify in advance the kind of the shortcut input that is commonly used by the user.

In the case of jinzhi (禁止) and zhuijian (逐 ㅇ), in order to solve the problem of using the syllable-based initial value, the syllable-based initial value of the recommended sound and the syllable-based initial code can be as follows. In Chinese, the vowel sounds “ch”, “sh”, and “zh” are actually a single Our Lady, and the main sign is represented by a single symbol, but in English alphabet, it is a combination of two alphabets. Accordingly, the syllable reference initial simple code of zhuijian according to FIGS. 10-6 may also be “4944” corresponding to “zh + j” including “h”. The syllable base initial code will be “494” which corresponds to “zh + j”. In the keypad of Fig. 10- *, the first letters “c”, “s”, and “z” that make up the recommended sounds “ch”, “sh”, zh ”are assigned to buttons different from the second letter“ h ”, so that“ jinzhi ( There is no ambiguity when the initial syllable of simple syllables of "Yu" and "zhuijian" is set to "444".

In the full-priority parallel input method using the syllable-based initial value simple code as the short input value, the input value “4 ~” is recognized as “z ~”, and when the input value “49 ~” is input, it is recognized as “zh ~”. Will be dealt with. However, since there are many words that begin with “zh ~”, it will be less meaningful even if the system treats the input value “49 ~” as “zh ~” and outputs the corresponding phrase to the user. Therefore, for the input value “49”, the system interprets the syllable-based initial value simple code and outputs the phrase “z__h__”. The underlined part means that the vowel is located. If “49” is interpreted as “zh” only, it is difficult to shorten the word whose initial syllable initial value is “z__h__”. In Chinese, since most words consist of one syllable (letter) or two syllables (letter), for short input of two syllable words, it is necessary to process shorthand input for the recommended sound input. See Figures 10-17. In Fig. 10-17, [禁止] followed by pale [. . .] Means that if the word "z__h__" is plural, other words of the subordinate order are printed. Of course, the words "zh__" can be printed in a lower order, and the word "zh__" can be set first according to the user's preference. However, it is convenient to have the word "z__h__" be printed first. something to do.

If a vowel input is recognized after "49" (for example, when the vowel button is pressed), the system will treat the input as "zh__" (ie, process the input as a full code). If a consonant input is recognized after "49" (for example, the consonant button is pressed), the system will treat the input as "zh__X__" (upper case "X" is an English consonant representing an arbitrary Virgin). In other words, even in the full-priority parallel input method, input of “ch”, “sh”, “zh”, etc. of the recommended sound is first interpreted as a simple code (a syllable-based initial value or a syllable-based initial code), and the next input is performed. Depending on whether the values are vowels or consonants, they are interpreted as full or simple codes.

The above is similar to the result of applying the consonant standard initial value simple code as a shortened input value and applying the shortened priority parallel input method. However, the syllable-based initial value simple code is applied as the short input value, and the full-priority parallel input method is applied. When input, it treats the input value as a shorthand input value (for example, searches for words that match the initiality of the word “z__h__” (for other recommended sounds such as 'ch', 'sh', etc.)). will be.

Although described above with reference to FIG. 10- *, it is obvious that the above concept can be applied to other keypads.

Furthermore, the same applies to PC keyboards and keypads, as well as all similar variations of the keyboard (the type of keyboard implemented on the screen can vary widely).

16. Parallel input method using simple code-capable alphabet combination

In the case of using the syllable-based initial code as the simple code, the method described above does not have the simple code index (eg 6242 / satongjipdan / 四通 集團) on the client side. This can also be useful if you have only an index of phrases (eg satongjipdan / 四通 集團). For example, “62… The second [2] is entered, the system recognizes that the input value violates the Chinese language limit, and the input value, “62…”. = sd… , st… , xd… , xt… (Conventionally, it is called 'available alphabet combination') 'and the words in the index can be searched for and matched to the first consonant of each syllable. The greater the number of button presses, the greater the number of possible alphabet combinations, which can be compared / searched for phrases in the index. See Figures 11-7. In the indexes of Figs. 11-7, “s t j p” and “s d ..”, “x d... ”,“ X t... ”(2 ** 4 = 16 possible), but with the input“ sd… ”. We could also provide the user with 四通 集團 by comparing this multi-value for each record. This is also not recommended because it is difficult to implement or have the same concept. See Figures 11-9. Either way, it is the same to compare the phrases of the index (Pinyin in Figures 11-9) with the possible alphabetic combinations that can be expressed as input values.

Similarly, if a client does not have a simple code index (e.g. 7799, Samsung Electronics) but only an index of a specific phrase (e.g. Samsung Electronics), the user may have "Samsung Electronics" in mind. ”, The system recognizes that the input value violates the Korean language restriction as soon as the second [7] is inputted, and the input value“ 77... = ㅅㅅ… , Your… , ㅆㅅ… , ㅆㅆ… (Conventionally, it is called 'available alphabet combination') 'and the words in the index can be searched for and matched to the first consonant of each syllable. See Figures 11-8.

If you find that a phrase that matches the input no longer exists in the index, you can treat the input as full code and present it to the user. This is similar to the parallel input method with the simple index on the word without the simple code on the premise that the user inputs only the syllable-based initial code value. However, this method is also the same as the procedure where the system detects the moment when the input value violates the full code generation rule in the full-priority parallel input method or the input value violates the language restriction in the full-priority parallel input method. The only difference is the procedure for retrieving a phrase corresponding to the input. In other words, when the system violates the full code generation rule or violates language restrictions, the system considers the input value as not a full code, but uses the point that the input value is a syllable-based initial code without using a simple code. Corresponding phrases are interpreted (or searched) and provided to the user.                     

The core content of the parallel input method is that the system automatically detects the moment of violating the full code generation rule or the language limitation, and regards the input value as a simple code (that is, the user inputs a shortcut instead of the full input). In the end, only the part of searching for the phrase corresponding to the input value in the previously proposed parallel input method is limited to the special case (using the syllable-based initial code).

As with the syllable-based initial code, if the simple code can be extracted automatically because of its regularity such as totally related simple code, consonant related simple code, first vowel + consonant related simple code, etc. It is possible to search the target phrase from the index by comparing the phrases of the index with the "alphabet combinations available". In FIG. 10-11, the system interprets the input value as a full code every time the input value is input, and confirms that the pinyin interpreted as the full code does not exist in the pinyin index. Thus, the target phrase can be searched by comparing the pinyin with the "available alphabet combination" for the input value. This is shown in Fig. 11-10, which represents a part ((2)-(B) part) of Fig. 10-11, and is an example of a case where an entire associated simple code is used.

17. Pool input method and parallel input method in the input system that stores the full code

It can be seen from the foregoing that it is somewhat complicated to identify the correct word for the input value by the specific language restriction full input method on the specific keypad. (E.g., English input and Chinese Pinyin input by the repeated selection method on the standard English keypad) As described in Chinese, if the system has an index of all words to be input not only in Chinese but also in other languages, the input value is 1 It is possible to interpret it as full code in the first place, and if it does not exist in the index, it can be interpreted as the secondly promised simple code.

For convenience, the Chinese case will be described as an example. If all the full codes are stored in the system storing all Chinese Pinyin (words possible in other languages) as shown in Figs. 10-14, the system simply recognizes the target alphabet by searching for a phrase that matches the input value. Can be. If we apply the full-priority parallel input method, the system will treat the input as if it were a simple code of the promised type as soon as the matching full code value no longer exists in the index. In FIG. 10-14, the process of inputting "北京" can be seen as a process of interpreting and processing the input value as a full code. It only stores the full code in the index, so the full code is interpreted by searching the index.

When applying the full input method in which words can be identified without ambiguity by the language restricted input method, it is not useful to store the full code in the index. However, this can be useful if you apply an ambiguous pool input method, such as the iterative selection method, and store all the indexes of the phrase you want to enter. As described earlier in “Language Input Methods on Incomplete Vowel Separation Keypads”, if all the words you want to enter are stored in the index when you apply the full input method, which may cause ambiguity (applies to Chinese as well as other languages). This full code index can be used to process input values.

Although the example of Chinese has been described above, it is obvious that the present invention can be applied to a case other than Chinese. The same may also be applied to the keypad of Fig. 1-1 as well as the keypad of Fig. 10- * and other keypads.

18. Parallel input method that processes input values into various types of codes (input values) at the same time

A parallel input method is possible in which certain types of codes (input values) are treated with respect to the input values. For example, in FIG. 10-14, if the input value is treated as a full code (A) and a totally associated simple code (B) at the same time, the system interprets the input value "1 * #" as a full code. Recognize "bei" when interpreted as "bai" and totally associated simple code. In this case, the system can provide "bai" and "bei" to the user at the same time.

In the case of the full priority parallel input method, the difference is that only "bei" is output when interpreted as a full code, and in the case of the short priority parallel input method, only "bai" which is the result of the interpretation as a promised short code is output. In this parallel input method, when the input value is no longer present in a certain type of code, the input value can be regarded as another type of code and processed, which is included in the category of the parallel input method mentioned above. Will be. In the index of the system, the full code and the associated simple code are not necessarily stored as shown in Figs. 10-14, but the same applies to the case where the input values are interpreted as various types of codes at the same time.

19. Priorities of words with ambiguity

In any one input method (e.g., a specific full input method or a specific type of short input method), when ambiguity occurs for the same input value, a specific input method is applied as shown in FIGS. 10-14 and other drawings. Target phrases may be output in the order based on the priority of when time ambiguity occurs. For example, when ambiguity occurs when the full input method is applied in FIGS. 10-14, the target phrase may be output and recommended to the user according to "(A) priority" which is the priority between the full codes (A). have.

Next, a case in which an input value is interpreted as predetermined various types of codes will be described. As illustrated above, when the input value "1 * #" is interpreted as a full code in FIG. 10-14, it becomes "bai", and when it is interpreted as a total correlation simple code, it becomes "bei". When ambiguity occurs, the system gives the target phrase to the user by priority when simultaneously interpreting it as a full code ((A) in Figures 10-14) and an overall associated simple code (B) in Figures 10-14. Can provide.

For example, an input value is treated as a full code primarily, but at the moment when it is found to violate the full code generation rule, violate the syllable generation rule of a specific language, or the full code corresponding to the index no longer exists. In the parallel input method that treats input values as syllable-based initial codes and syllable-based initial values simple codes, when processing input values as short codes, "syllable-based initial codes" and "syllable-based initial values simple" Can be handled based on priority when ambiguity between codes "occurs. (I.e., if the syllable-based initial code is (C) and the syllable-based initial code simple code is (D), output the target phrase by "(C) + (D) priority")

Although Chinese has been described as an example, it is obvious that the same applies to other languages if the target phrase is Pinyin rather than inputting Chinese characters.

20. Parallel input method using the control processing method as a full input method

2-1 and 2-2, when the control buttons to the [*] and [#] button and the control method except the representative alphabet is applied, the parallel input method is applied, but all the words consisting of only the representative alphabet in the index After saving and applying the short-priority parallel input method, it is pointed out that as soon as "*" or "#" is pressed as input value, the system can treat the input value as a full code.

In the Japanese of FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2, it is assumed that all shortcodes consist of numeric values only. In this case, an index (which may be included in the short code index or may be configured separately from the short code index) that stores all words consisting of only representative alphabets is applied, and the parallel input method is applied, but only numeric buttons are used as input values. While the key is pressed, both the result of interpreting the input value as a full code and the result of interpreting the short code by referring to the index (or simple code index including the word) consisting of only representative alphabets, according to the predetermined priority Can be provided to the user as a target phrase.

For example, if the input values “111” are processed as full codes in the input values Fig. 2-1 and Fig. 2-2 (that is, when the full priority parallel input method is applied), it is interpreted as “あ あ あ”. If there is no word starting with “あ あ ~” by referring to the index of all words consisting of letters only, and only “あ い” or “あ い ~” exists, “あ い” or “あ い ~” takes precedence over “あ あ ~”. Can be provided to the user.

See FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16. In FIG. 10-15, the input value “11” is interpreted as a full code. Since this is a word composed only of representative alphabets, the search is performed again to search for “index of all words composed only of representative alphabets” and confirm whether it is a valid word. If “あ あ”, which is a full code of “11”, is present in the index, it can be recognized as a valid word for the input value. When it is confirmed that the phrase corresponding to the input value no longer exists in the index of all words consisting only of the representative alphabet, the system interprets the input value again as a simple code and the system recognizes the corresponding "あ い". 10-15, the system recognizes “あ い” as the highest priority with respect to the input value “11”. Depending on the input after “11”, “あ い ...” (“…” can be added with “あ い” followed by another alphabet), so the system outputs it in the order next to “あ い”. You may. Similarly, even if it does not exist in the index, the target phrase may be "あ あ", so it can also be output in the next order of "あ い". In Figs. 10-15, the words "あ い ..." and "あ あ" in dim colors and the second and third recommendation sequences indicate that the system can output this and only "あ い".

In Figs. 10-15, (1), (2), and (3) may occur sequentially, or may occur simultaneously as mentioned in the "parallel input method for recognizing input values as several types of codes at the same time". Similarly, the full and simple codes in the index are for understanding only, and it is obvious that the same procedure can be performed even if the full and simple codes are not stored. Simple code that can be interpreted regularly, such as associative simplek). As shown in Fig. 10-16, the case where the index and the simple code index of all words consisting only of the representative alphabet exist as one index is the same. Implementation data structures can take many forms.

The operation result of the system is similar to the parallel input method described above, but it is not applied to the short-priority parallel input method, but to the full priority parallel input method or the general parallel input method.

This can be equally applied to all parallel input methods using the control processing method as a full input method as well as a parallel input method using the control processing method except the representative alphabet as a full input method.

17. Input of function

When entering phrases (sentences) among the functions, blanks are a mandatory function, and the delete (undo input) function is also required. Enter function can be solved by no input for a certain period of time after input, but it is also a necessary function. These three functions are collectively called "three basic functions" for convenience. In addition, in case of a language such as English, a case switching function is also required. The up / down / left / right movement functions can be replaced by the deletion and blank functions, and the up / down movement functions are not required.

Here are some examples of various functions for inputting phrases in order of essential functions. Of course, this is a reference only, not an absolute criterion and may vary slightly depending on the particular situation. If you enter Chinese through the English keypad, Chinese character conversion will be the most essential function. In addition, the Chinese character conversion function may be an important function in a Chinese character culture language such as Japanese or Korean.

1. Space-Enter-Delete-Change case-Change national / numeric / English mode-Move (up / down / left / right)

2. Space-Delete-Enter-Local / Numeric / English Mode Switch-Case Change-Move (Up / Down / Left / Right)

3. Space-Enter-Delete-Hanja conversion-National language / number / English conversion-Move (up / down / left / right)

4. Chinese Character Conversion-Blank-Enter-Delete-English / Number Mode Switch-Move

17.1 Function Input by Control Processing Method

It has been explained that alphabets and various symbols can be selected by the control processing method. The same can be applied to selecting various functions. 12-1 is an example showing that the meaning of various functions can be given to the numeric buttons, which can be implemented in combination with "function control". The number buttons associated with each button can be assigned to make it easier to remember. In FIG. 12-1, the left and right up and down arrows can be intuitively recognized, and placing an enter in the center can also be used to easily understand the number buttons and related functions. The remaining necessary functions can also be facilitated by associating with the buttons in which the alphabets associated with the names of the functions in each language are arranged. In Fig. 12-1, the shift function is associated with the [7] button to which "S" is assigned.

For convenience, in FIG. 12-1, as shown in the case of Korean for the filing application, assuming that the sound control and the sound control are selected according to the number of times of pressing the [*] button, the function control is selected next, Enter = [5] + { } = [5] + [*] + [*] + [*] If the alphabet selected by the [5] button 1 is an alphabet without a beep / beep, enter may be entered when [5] + [*] is pressed by applying the skip control process.

The function associated with each button may or may not be displayed on the numeric buttons. However, it is pointed out that by displaying a number button associated with a group of various symbols on a part of the LCD screen so as to be easily understood, it is possible to add convenience of use while maintaining a simple arrangement without displaying on the button. The same can be applied here. See Figure 12-2. Also, as pointed out in the symbol input, the user may redefine the function and the function associated with the numeric keypad.

When the [*] or [#] button is not used as another control button, as in the case of English, “*” button can be used to select “function control”. *] Press the button once to enter the function.

17.2 Input of functions by multidimensional cross control processing method (using cross combination of control buttons)

One control button is used to input one alphabet. The same is true when the same control button is used repeatedly.

When [*] and [#] are used as control buttons, and alphabets and various symbols are input as the one-dimensional control processing method, the cross combination of control buttons (in this case, [*] + [#], [#] + [ *]) Can be used to input various functions. If the control buttons are not used repeatedly, you can use [*] + [*] or [#] + [#] to enter the function. “[*] + [#]” Is from left to right, so it can be easily recognized by the user when used as the right movement function (or blank). On the contrary, [#] + [*] can be easily recognized by the user when used as a left-to-right movement (or deletion).

This can be understood in terms of multidimensional intersection control processing. In case of inputting ^ a = a + [*] by applying the control after input as an example, if the user inputs “a + [*] + [#]”, the system inputs up to a + [*]. ^ a is recognized as input, but since [#] cannot follow (even if the [#] button is used as another control button), the moment the [#] is entered, the system will return “[*] + [#]. Can be recognized as having entered the right shift function. It is similar to the case of specifying the control line input.

In the case of Japanese, the two-dimensional control processing method is applied. In this case, the function can be implemented by combining control buttons three times (or more). For example, enter space = [*] + [#] + [*], delete = [#] + [*] + [#]. In the case of the blank function, the shape formed when you press [*] + [#] + [*] reminds you of the arrowhead of the right arrow. In the case of deletion, it can be easily remembered when you press [#] + [*] + [#] to remind you of the arrowhead of the left arrow. The reason for this is the same as described earlier.

In summary, it can be seen that various functions can be input by combining control buttons twice when applying the one-dimensional control processing method, and combining control buttons three times when applying the two-dimensional control processing method. have. In other words, when the N-dimensional control processing method is applied for input of alphabets and various symbols, various functions can be input by alternately combining N + 1 control buttons.

18. Chinese character conversion

Korean and Chinese Pinyin and Chinese characters have a 1: multi correspondence. For example, a Chinese character corresponding to "politeness" means 禮 意, 禮 儀, 銳意…. There will be many like this.

In the case of Chinese, the Chinese characters corresponding to “beijing” are 北京 and 背景 (unless there is an adult sign). Therefore, it is possible to repeatedly press the Hanja Conversion button to select the next Chinese character (eg 北京 (2nd), 背景 (3rd)). For example, if you enter the etiquette beijing and press the Hanja conversion function once, it will be Beijing and if you press it again, it will be 背景. Or you can choose from a list.

In Chinese, in order to input Chinese characters, all Chinese characters (called “target Chinese characters”) need to be stored in the index. Therefore, even when entering Chinese Pinyin, if the target Chinese character can be determined, Can provide. For example, “beij… If the word starting with "is only" 北京 ", the user can provide" 北京 "to the user when the user enters" beij ". If there is only one "beijing (北京)" in the Pinyin index, the system will convert "beijing" to "北京" as soon as "beijing" is recognized as a definite target even if the user does not confirm the target Chinese character in the middle of the input. You can print it.

In the case of Japanese, hiragana and katakana have a 1: 1 correspondence, and hiragana or katakana and kanji have a 1: multi relationship. Accordingly, it has been described that it is possible to convert Katakana by inputting Katakana conversion control (eg, “a / a” control in FIG. 2-1) after inputting hiragana. If in Figure 2-1 the modified alphabet is entered by the cross-control processing method, the "ah / ah" control can be selected by the [0] button two. Here again, Chinese characters corresponding to a specific hiragana or katakana may be selected by repeatedly pressing the [0] button. For example, if you designate the “A / A” control as a post-input, press [0] + [0] after entering a hiragana word (or alphabet) to convert it into a katakana corresponding to the hiragana you entered. Pressing the button will switch to the first Chinese character and pressing the [0] button once will switch to the next Chinese character. In the Katakana input mode, on the other hand, if you press [0] + [0] after inputting katakana, it is converted to the corresponding hiragana, and if you press the [0] button once again, it can be converted to Chinese characters.

19. Construction of Simple Code Index

Among the simple codes presented by the applicant, all related simple codes, syllable based initial codes, consonant related simple codes, first vowels + consonant related simple codes, and word based initial codes are mechanically (ie, automatically) specific phrases (words or phrases). There is a good property to extract simple code from. Therefore, a simple code index (index consisting of simple codes and simple code corresponding phrases) can be automatically constructed with respect to a word once entered by the user using the full input method, and this can be used for a parallel input method. The simple code may be stored on the client side or the server side in an environment similar to that of Fig. 5-5, or may be stored on both the client side and the server side.

It is also possible to generate different kinds of simple chords (eg totally related simple chords and syllable-based initial chords) for the same phrase. In general, however, it will be convenient to use a simple code of a specific type, and the user only needs to be aware of the type of simple code that is automatically generated and can be used when applying the parallel input method. Applying this, the more the user's character input has the effect that the simple code index is richer.

In order to extract syllable-based initial codes from specific phrases of a specific language, it is necessary to separate syllables from specific words. Separation of syllables from certain words of a particular language is possible according to the rules of consonant separation. Since each language has a convex rule, it is not difficult to automatically separate syllables from a specific word by using them.                     

For example, in Chinese Pinyin, "Zhongguo" can be divided into syllables "Zhong" and "guo" around the vowels "o" and "uo", which is much more than the process of recognizing the Pinyin in the present invention. It can be done more easily. In the example of separating the syllables by forward scanning from the beginning of the word, the consonant "n" after "zho" cannot be known as the consonant of the next syllable, but the consonant "g" shows the consonant belonging to the first syllable. Similarly, "g" may be the consonant of the next syllable, but the next "g" shows that the first "g" is the consonant of the first syllable and the second "g" is the consonant of the next syllable. (A syllable may end in "~ ng" in the Pinyin.) The first syllable "zhong" can be separated by scanning up to "zhongg". Next, "u" is naturally a vowel forming the second syllable, and the system recognizes that the vowel "o" coming out is also a vowel forming the second syllable. Since the alphabet after "o" is no longer in the alphabet, the system can separate the syllables of "zhongguo" into "zhong" and "guo", so the syllable It can be recognized that the initial value is "zg", and it can be identified that the initial syllable initial code of "zhongguo" is "43" (based on Fig. 10-6). Of course, the rest of the languages can automatically separate syllables from specific words or phrases according to the syllable separation rules of the language.

20. Analysis of target phrases from phrases without a special code

In the case of beijing, if the vowel is not attached to the vowel, it corresponds to both “北京” or “背景”. In this case, pressing a specific button repeatedly allows the user to select a target phrase or to select one of them from the list. It was said.

Similarly, in languages other than Chinese, if the user inputs the vowels or the vowels with subscripts, but only the basic vowels are entered, the target phrase is provided to the user by searching the index in response to the repeated pressing of a specific button, or the index is searched. Thus, the user may be provided with a list of the corresponding phrases including the subscripted vowels to the user for selection.

This may be useful in languages with many variations of the alphabet, such as Vietnamese, and complex tonal signs. However, the system should be equipped with an index of phrases that are subscripted to the basic alphabet. Similarly, building such an index can be built from words that the user has already entered. For example, if a user enters the word “^ + abc” (with the subscript '^' on the 'a') through character input, the system stores “^ + abc” in the system (“abc” You can save both “^ + abc” corresponding to ”and“ abc ”), and if user presses a certain button after entering“ abc ”, give“ ^ + abc ”to the user or“ abc ” You can provide the user with a list of phrases corresponding to "abc", such as "^ + abc" when typing. If "abc" is the target phrase, the user will not press a specific button or will choose 'abc' even if the system provides a list of related phrases. The point in time when the list is provided may be the point at which the entry of words is terminated and may be any point in the middle of the entry.

25. A parallel input method in which a part of a phrase (word or phrase) is entered as a full input method and a part is entered as a short input method.

According to the word input (full code input), a method of outputting a word that matches the input content from an index and allowing a user to select it has been widely used. For example, think of the "autocomplete" feature of Windows. Even when full input (input by full code), the index (e.g. index for parallel input) can be referred to, and the matching phrase among words (words or phrases) stored in the index can be output and the user can select / determine it. Of course.

This will be described with reference to the input system of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8 as follows. For example, suppose the words "Thank you" and "Thank you" are stored in the index. If "10 * = high" is entered, the system will match words "high ..." (that is, words that begin with "high", "thank you", "thank you", ...) in the proper form. You can print it out. In a mobile phone-like environment, the contents generated by the input value are displayed on the input line (top of the liquid crystal in FIG. 13-1), and candidate phrases (words or phrases) printed by referring to the index are similar to the list or the list at the bottom. It can be output in the form. The user selects a desired word using a movement button (navigation button), etc., and enters it after confirming. See FIG. 13-1 for an example of a mobile phone liquid crystal. 13-1 illustrates an example of outputting a word that matches a syllable formed according to a full input at a lower end of a liquid crystal.                     

If you input “thank you”, you can enter up to “high” and then input the remaining syllables as a shortcut input (shorthand input using syllable-based initial value simple code in the example). That is to say, “Go + ㅁㅅㄴㄷ = 10 * + 5723”. Here, the first syllable is “high” and the remaining syllables may provide the user with a word whose initial value corresponds to “ㅁㅅㄴㄷ” (ie, “thank you”).

However, about half of Korean syllables are syllables with finality and the other half are syllables without finality. In the case of “Thank you”, if you input “1 * 05723” consecutively, it will be “bear”. The system will process “bear” = 1 * 057 ”as normal full input and enter“ 2 ”as soon as it is input. Recognizing that a part of the value does not form a normal Korean syllable, the part that does not form the remaining syllables (eg “ㅅ ㄴㄷ = 723”) can be regarded as a shortcut input and processed. This also belongs to the category of "Parallel Input Method (Priority-Priority Input Method)" mentioned in the previous application, and the syllables recognized by the full input (eg, "bear") are naturally interpreted as full codes. Input values (eg “ㅅ ㄴㄷ = 723”) are interpreted as simple codes.

Here, a word including a syllable pre-formed by a full input may be searched for and provided in the index (for example, when “index” is stored in the index), or a word corresponding to an input value interpreted as a simple code ( Yes, if "is" is stored in the index), or both. When outputting both, the specified word (e.g., a word containing the part interpreted as a full code first or vice versa, or based on the priority of the word or over a group of words) Can be output to the top. Since various means are possible, it would be desirable to allow the user to set this output order.

In case of outputting both, in response to “bear”, when “bear” and “we” are displayed at the bottom of the liquid crystal display, if the user selects “bear”, the entire “bear” is “bear”. It will be replaced by “Yes”, and when “Yes” is selected, it is natural that “sb” will be replaced by “Yes” and become “bear”.

If only “thank you” is stored in the index, you will not be able to output “thank you” in response to a continuous input of the input value “1 * 05723”. Thus, the system can additionally interpret "1 * 05723" as "bear" and "goss", which can be interpreted at the same time and output the matching words (provided to the user) by referring to the index. Interpretation of “bear” as “high” means that if the syllable before “s” ends with a final consonant, which is recognized as the beginning of the abbreviation, except the first consonant (ie, “high”), the final consonant In a single consonant between "high" and "ㅅ". It may seem a bit complicated, but it is easy for anyone with basic knowledge of Hangul processing. The same applies to the case where double consonants are used as the finality. Figure 13-2 illustrates the word (s) of a particular group designated as "prioritizing output". Word (s) containing parts interpreted as full code Word (s) that do not contain the part interpreted as full code . . Show the example of outputting candidate words by applying the order of. In this case, "is" is printed first, and belonged to the designated group.

If you want the user to interpret only "high", enter "10 * = high" and then use the promised operation to give the syllable confirmation (e.g., no appointment for a certain amount of time, or press the right arrow [>] button once). By pressing “5723” and then only searching for words that are interpreted as “go”. In this case, you can also print out words that correspond to “Go” (including “thank you”), including the pre-recognized syllables “Go”, and, except for “Go”, words that correspond to “ㅁㅅㄴㄷ” ( Yes, if "yes" is stored in the index), or both. See Figure 13-3.

Here, pressing the right arrow button (hereinafter referred to as “[>] button”) as an operation button for intentional syllable confirmation may act as syllable confirmation. In addition, the [>] button can be used as a blank button. After the syllable is confirmed, it can act as a blank input. In other words, if the [>] button is pressed once after entering the “high”, the syllable “high” is confirmed, and if the [>] button is pressed again, it becomes “high” (“high” + blank). In other words, if "10 *> 5723" is input, the system can interpret it as "go" and provide the user with the corresponding word "thank you". Of course, if the system refers to the example index, it is obvious that the system can output "thank you" even if only "10 *> 57 = thank you".

In the parallel input method, the processing including the syllables formed by the full input may be useful when the target word is determined from the list of candidate words when providing candidate words matching the middle of the full input. In addition, when outputting candidate words corresponding only to input values processed as short inputs (that is, input values that are interpreted as simple codes) except for pre-formed syllables, it is useful to quickly input frequently used suffix or word search as short inputs. something to do. For example, enter "thank you" and confirm your entry by some means, and then enter "Yes" (assuming it is stored in the index). Frequently used suffixes such as “...” can be placed in a separate group (eg, a suffix group) in the index so that the words of the group will be preferentially outputted when candidate words are output in parallel input. If you type “thank you”, both “thank you” and “you” may appear in the candidate word list if both “thank you” and “you” are stored in the index.

One more example, when inputting “Sejong o = 70 ## 90 * 838”, “Sejong” can be processed as a full input, and “38” that does not form an appropriate syllable can be treated as a shorthand input value. Likewise, if there is only "Sejong the Great" in the index, "Sejong the Great" will be printed. Conversely, if there is only "great king" in the index, only "great king" will be printed. If both "Sejong the Great" and "Great King" are present, they may all be printed, but it would be desirable to have only one output (with or without the part processed by full input) by appointment. Also, in the case of the "Moon Mun Great," it will be "Moon Mu" if you input "c" continuously after inputting it to "Moon Mu". Therefore, to input “munmu” to full input, and to input only “great king” to short input, enter “munmu” and confirm the input syllable “munmu” (eg right arrow [>] button to end syllable). Press once to confirm), and then enter “38 = ㄷㅇ”. Here, even though “Great King” has a lower priority than other words in the index (eg “Tawa”) that correspond to “ㄷ = 38”, if the “Treasure King” is stored in the index, the input value “5 * 025 * 0 > 38 ”can be outputted with“ great king ”in preference to other candidate words (eg“ Tawa ”).

Furthermore, even when inputting by short input, such as “a ㅁ = 157 * 623”, and inputting some syllables by full input, it is possible to treat the corresponding “thank you”. If “157 = ㄱㅁㅅ” is input, the system interprets the simple code (in the example, syllable-based initial value or syllable-based initial code) “157” and searches for a word with each syllable corresponding to “ㄱㅁㅅ”. If “* 6” is input again, the system can recognize that the syllable “7 * 6 = wet” is formed with “157 * 6 = a custom”. That is, if the system recognizes that the previously input “15” is a shortened input value and “23” is input again, it can be treated as a shortened input value because an appropriate syllable is not formed. In this case, too, the system may interpret some syllables as full codes in “A” and some syllables as short codes, and provide a corresponding “thank you” to the user.

In Chinese, a syllable is said to be composed of "Our Lady + Mica". In the Chinese pinyin symbol, “Mary” is the consonant of the Roman alphabet, and “Mica” is the vowel of Roman alphabet or “vowel + n” or “vowel + ng”. In other words, one Chinese character (one syllable) written in Pinyin is composed of Roman alphabet “consonants + vowels” or “consonants + vowels + n” or “consonants + vowels + ng”. Rarely, there may be syllables beginning with the vowel “a”, “e”, or “o”. Here, we have already pointed out that the Roman alphabet consonants that can come to the end of the Pinyin syllable are only “n” or “ng”. This can be regarded as the finality of Korean. Only consonant "n" or "ng" can be used as a final consonant.

For example, in Pinyin index, “中華 (zhonghua)”, “民國 (minguo)”, “中華民國 (zhonghuaminguo)”,. . . Suppose a word such as is stored, input the pinyin by full input to "中華 (zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *, based on Fig. 10-6)", and input only "民國 (minguo)" For example, enter "mg = 73 (refer to Fig. 10-6)" as a shortcut input using a syllable-based initial value simple code as a shortcut input. After inputting the Pinyin (“zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *”) in the input of “中華”, “mg = 73” may be entered after the process of selecting and confirming among the candidate Chinese characters listed is entered, or Pinyin “ After entering zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## * ”,“ mg = 73 ”may be entered continuously. In the former case, “minguo”, 民歌 (minge), corresponding to “73 = mg”. . . It is natural to output only words such as the candidate words. In the latter case, it is interpreted as “中華” for the input value “49 *** 7739 ## *” and outputs “中華民國” along with “民國” corresponding to “73” recognized as a shortened input value. It is also natural. For input value “49 *** 7739 ## * 73 = zhonghua + mg”, for input up to “49 *** 7739 ## * 7”, the last “7” is the input of Pinyin and normal full input. The system recognizes this, but as soon as the last "3" is input, the system recognizes that the last two input values "73" are shortened input values. This is the same as in the case of Korean described above. Therefore, the system is responsible for the input value “49 *** 7739 ## * 73” and the “中華” corresponding to the full input value “49 *** 7739 ## *” and “民國” corresponding to the short input value “73”. It is possible to print the word “中華民國” which consists of two words. See Figure 13-4.

On the contrary, input “中華” as “zh = 49” by short-cutting, and do not select “中華” among candidate words. Instead, input “民國” as full input “7 # 773 ## ***”. When input (ie, “497 # 773 ## *** = zhminguo”), “中華民國” corresponding to “z__h__minguo” can be output. Likewise, if you input “73 ## ***” to input “民國 (minguo)”, you can output “民國” by interpreting “73 ## *** = mguo = m__guo”. As soon as "73" is pressed, the system considers the shortcut input and searches for and processes the word corresponding to "m__g__", but treats the following "## *** = uo" as the second syllable vowel. . Entering “uo” followed by “mg” compresses “民國” among candidate words corresponding to “m__g__”.

After inputting Chinese characters "China" by other means (all Chinese input means such as short input, full input, stroke input, etc.), and inputting "Korea" as "73" by short input, simply input value " 73 ”is interpreted as a simple code, and a word corresponding to“ m__g__ ”is provided to the user, a number of candidate words (eg“ 民國 (minguo) ”, 民歌 (minge), ..) in the form of a list Will be output. However, if "中華民國" is stored, it is possible to interpret "中華民國" as "中華民國", apart from having "民國" stored in the index. In this case, “中華” has already been entered in Chinese characters, so “民國” will be output in preference to other candidate words (eg “民歌 (minge)”, ..) in response to the input value “mg = 73”. Can be.

When “zhong ...” is entered here, the system may be interpreted as “zho” + “n__g__” or “zhon” + ”g__”. However, since there are no syllables of “zho” or “zhon” in Chinese Pinyin (ie, of course not in Pinyin index), “zhong ...” is interpreted as “中” by referring to the index. If it exists, when "zhong" is input, it can be output as a candidate word in a predetermined output order. With respect to the input of “zhongg ... = 49 *** 7733” based on Figs. 10-6, it may be interpreted as “zhonk ..” = “zho” + “n__k__” or “zhon” + “k__”. There will be. This is similar to the parallel input method in which the input values are interpreted simultaneously as full code and short input values (simple code).

In the above example, an example of using a syllable-based initial value simple code as a shortcut input value (simple code) is presented. However, when "syllable-based initial code" is applied as a shortcut input value, FIG. The contents mentioned in FIGS. 11-10 can be applied.

26. Character input method using long press and control processing method using long press

In general, it is called “alphabet,” including one alphabet (number of letters, numbers, special characters), functions, and controls for various purposes in a language that does not speak English as its first language. Can be expressed). Here, you can press a specific button once but use "long press" to express an object different from the object by simply pressing once. Long press of a particular button is referred to as "long press" or "long hit". In the following description, "long press" does not mean a normal button press, and in particular, in contrast to a long press is referred to as "danta". Hereinafter, the general content will be described in the case of English, and the application examples for each language will be described. However, it is obvious that the content described in one language may be equally applied to other languages.

26.1 English (and Common)

26.1.1 Long press alphabet input

Currently, pressing and holding a specific number button is used to enter the number. However, it is not always possible to input numbers only. For example, pressing each number button once in Fig. 1-1 inputs the first alphabet among the letters assigned to the corresponding button (ex. “A” by pressing the [2] button 1 time). A), by pressing and holding the second letter (eg “B”) can be entered. However, long press is a factor that cuts off the natural flow of the input, and it is not desirable to apply it to input of the alphabet that is frequently input. Therefore, it is desirable to apply the input by long press (long stroke) to input an infrequently used object. In addition, it would be desirable to allow the user to set the time recognized as long press as long as possible according to each user's skill.

In the present invention, a long press is appropriately used, but it can be shown that the input rule of a specific input method can be simplified, the range of expression can be broadened, and further ambiguity can be removed. For the sake of convenience, press and hold the [2] button for “2” followed by a tilde (~) to indicate “2 ~”. As mentioned above, if the [2] button is pressed three times in Fig. 1-1 when applying the existing repetition selection method, it is possible to know whether “222” is “C”, “AAA”, “AB” or “BA”. Unambiguous ambiguity occurs.

In Figure 1-1, "A" presses the [2] button long or presses the corresponding button once, "B" presses the corresponding button once after entering "A", and "C" presses the corresponding button once after entering the "B" (or For example, define “A” and press twice.) In the case where the alphabets on the same button are continuously input, in the second and subsequent alphabet inputs, if the character starts with a long press, it can also be input without ambiguity. For example, when inputting “DACB”, you can enter “3 2 2 ~ 22 2 ~ 2” without ambiguity, and “ACB” on the same button will appear continuously, but if you press “C”, “B” long press By mediating, it can be identified without ambiguity. This example can be entered with a feeling almost similar to the existing repetitive selection method, and only when the alphabet assigned to the same button is continuously input, there is an effect of eliminating ambiguity by using a long press. Of course, in the case of “DACB = 322 ~ 222 ~ 2”, it is also possible to use the [2] button long press (ie “2 ~”) on the “A” input.

The above example uses a representative alphabet of any of the alphabets assigned to a particular button (including both explicit and implicit assignments) (eg “A”) and the remaining alphabets (eg “B”, "C") can be seen as a subsequent alphabet to enter the representative alphabet and the button assigned to the subsequent alphabet by pressing a predetermined number of times. That is, “A, representative alphabet”? B (2nd followup alphabet)? C (3rd follow-up alphabet) ”,“ A = 2 ~ ”,“ B = A + 2 = “2 ~ 2”, “C = B + 2 = A + 2 + 2 = 2 ~ 22 Is to do. It is also possible to input “A” instead of holding it long, but also by pressing it normally (ie, single stroke), unless the alphabet assigned to the same button is inputted continuously. It is also possible to input with a normal single press (ie, single stroke) as in the method. For convenience, this is referred to as "repetitive selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet".

If you use only one button to enter two alphabets, you can define one alphabet as a normal single press (ie, single stroke) and another alphabet as a long press (ie, long stroke). (E.g., “B = 1”, “P = 1 ~” in Fig. 10-1) However, as shown in Fig. 1-1, three alphabetic characters are assigned (explicitly or implicitly) as shown in Fig. 1-1. (E.g. [2] button), define the first alphabet as a single press (e.g. “A = 2”, define the second alphabet as a long press (e.g. “B = 2 ~”, the third alphabet) Defining two presses (eg “C = 22”) or long presses and one press (eg “C = 2 ~ 2”) also results in ambiguity when entering the third alphabet. If it is defined, it can be interpreted as “AA” and if it is defined as “C = 2 ~ 2,” it can also be interpreted as “BA.” In this case, the first, second, and third eggs Beth may optionally be set. In this case, the number of times that this ambiguity may occur than in ordinary simple repeat selection method is greatly reduced.

The advantage of the repeated selection method using a long press may be more useful for inputting not only the alphabet assigned to each button, but also the numbers and symbols associated with each button, with the fact that it can be entered without ambiguity. For example, certain "button x" is associated with certain alphabet (s) "A1, A2, A3, ..." (explicitly assigned or implicitly assigned), and the specific number "N1" is associated with Assume that the specific symbol (s) "S1, S2, S3, ..." are related. In this case, it may be defined as a long press on an arbitrary alphabet associated with “button x”. For example, the alphabet "A1" is designated as the representative alphabet, and the long press "button x" is inputted. The input of "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3" associated with "Button x" is shown in a graph form as shown in Figure 14-3. It can be seen from FIG. 14-3 that “A1S1 = xx ~ xxxx” or “A1S1 = x ~ x ~ xxxx” is input. If the language is not English as a native language, the English alphabets “E1, E2, E3, ...” may be additionally associated.

Furthermore, in entering objects related to "button x" (eg, "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3"), it is not a repetitive selection method by long pressing a representative alphabet, but a normal repetition selection. By applying the method, it is also possible to input the associated numbers and various symbols (special characters). However, ambiguity occurs when you enter objects that are related to the same button consecutively. Therefore, after entering one object, enter [Delayed fixed time delay] or delimiter (eg, "Complement of parallel input method". It is necessary to ensure that ambiguity does not occur due to the input of the>] button once. For example, if “A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3” is associated with “Button x” and “S1A1” is entered by repeat selection method, “S1A1 = xxxxx> x” will be entered. Can be. This is a technique used to overcome ambiguity in applying the iterative selection method, except that a specific number and symbol group can be inputted to a specific button.

Currently, if there is a national language alphabet “A1, A2, A3” associated with (assigned) “button x”, it will be “x = A”, “xx = B”, “xxx = C”, or defined maximum repetition When pressed more than (e.g. “button x” pressed four times), it was a circular toggle such as “xxxxx = A” and “xxxxx = B”. The circular toggle seems to be a consideration that allows the user to input the target alphabet again by repeatedly pressing the button that was pressed when an input error occurred when applying the repetitive selection method. However, as suggested by the applicant, if the input of the delete button acts as the deletion of the "recent input value" instead of the deletion of the entire alphabet being generated, it is not necessary to apply a cyclic toggle method. You should only press “xx = B” because if you enter “xxx = C”, you can enter “B” by pressing the Delete button once, even if you do not press “xx” to enter “B”. .

14-4 illustrates a process of inputting an alphabet by a long press after a short press of a specific button. In Fig. 14-4, the lines A1, A2, A3, ... are input processes by the conventional repetition selection method. In B2, A1 is inputted by a short press of a button (eg, button “x”), and then a long press of the same button is combined. That is, “A1 = x” and “B2 = xx ~”. If no alphabet input is defined by a long press of the button x, and if only the letters A1 and B2 are input by using the button x, they can be recognized without ambiguity. Even if the long press of the button x is defined as a certain alphabet (eg, the letter E1), if no "A1" and "E1" are present at the same time, then these language restrictions are used. Without ambiguity, A1, B2, E1 can be entered.

Again, in FIG. 14-4, if the long press of “button x” is not defined as any alphabetic input, A1, B2, C3 can be recognized without ambiguity. Also, in the case of A1, A2, and D3, there may be ambiguity as “A1 = x” and “A2 = xx = A1A1”. Language restrictions), allowing A1, A2, and D3 to be entered without ambiguity. The same method as in Fig. 14-4 is called "repetitive selection method by long pressing after short pressing" for convenience. For example, in Figure 10-6, enter "i = #", "u = # ~", and set a random vowel (eg " ^.. u"-"u" superscript ". Alphabets with ".") Can be entered without ambiguity (in Chinese Pinyin, "i" and "u" are not consecutive). Of course, since "i"doesn't appear in a row, it is possible to enter any other object with "##". The same can be applied to other languages. In FIG. 14-4, it may be used to input subordinate alphabets (eg, S1, S2, S3, ...) in the A1, A2, and A3 rows.

26.1.2 Control method using long press

Next, an example of application to the selection of controls is shown. In the following example, the control is assumed to be input later. In the previous example, the [2] button is to express “A” for both hits and long hits. However, a specific object may be expressed by pressing a specific button once, and another object may be expressed by long pressing the same button. For example, a single press of a particular button (eg [1] button) may indicate a particular object (eg any “alphabet x” where “x” means any alphabet, not actually “x”). A long press can represent a different object (eg, an arbitrary alphabet). That is, "alphabet x = 1", "alphabet y = 1 ~". In this example, any of the letters “alphabet x” and “alphabet y” are conceptual, so they are usually defined as “A = 2 ~” or “A = 2” in “Repetitive Selection Method by Long Pressing Representative Alphabet”. The letter “A” corresponds to the letter x, and the letter “A” corresponds to the letter “y”.

The same applies to the selection of controls. For example, any button (e.g. [*] button as a control button) can be pressed once to represent a specific object (e.g. any "control a1"), and a long press of the same button can be used for another specific object (e.g. Can represent any “control b1”). "A2 control", "a3 control", ..., etc. can be selected by pressing the control button repeatedly. The important thing here is to select “b1 control” by pressing and holding the control button, then “b2 control”, “b3 control”, “b4 control”, etc. can be selected by repeating pressing, not long pressing. . Again, no ambiguity occurs. This can be referred to the case in which only the representative alphabet "A" in the previous example is entered by pressing and holding, and in the subsequent subsequent alphabet selection, the single stroke is combined.

For convenience, the object to be inputted by the combination of a specific button (eg [1] button) and the "b1 control" is displayed as "B1".

“A1 = x + {a1 control} = 1 *”, “A2 = x + {a2 control} = 1 **”, “A3 = x + {a3 control} = 1 ***”,. . . ,

“B1 = x + {b1 control} = 1 * ~”, “B2 = x + {b2 control} = 1 * ~ *”, “B3 = x + {b3 control} = 1 * ~ **”,. . .

Of course, it is also possible to apply one hit, two hits and three hits respectively to the selection of the b1, b2 and b3 controls. However, it is too natural to have a long press often. As in the case of B1, B2, B3, ..., pressing the control button once long and then inputting it by normal pressing is called “Long Press and Repeat Press” for convenience, and this control method is “Long Press and Repeat Press”. Control processing method by ". A1, A2, ... series means the control method suggested previously, and B1, B2, ... series means "control method by repeated pressing after long press." The above contents are shown in Fig. 14-1. The above is an example of applying the one long press only to the first control selection as in the repeated selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-2, various expansions (eg, C-series and D-series) are possible by additionally long pressing.

Of course, if you apply a long press of a button (for example, the [1] button) that is not a control button (eg, “alphabet”), you can express another object. Furthermore, it is possible to repeat the selection method using long press (eg “A = 2 ~”, “B = 2 ~ 2”, “C = 2 ~ 22”). Alphabets) can be identified without ambiguity, so you can enter three different alphabets by pressing the control button repeatedly or pressing and holding the control button after selecting three alphabets that can be selected by using the numeric buttons. . That is, in Figure 1-1, by pressing the control button repeatedly after inputting "A", it is possible to enter the alphabet (meaning symbols, numbers, mother tongue, English alphabet, etc.) of a specific group (eg group 1), By pressing “Long Press and Repeat” you can enter the alphabet of another specific group (eg Group 2). Likewise, the alphabet of group 3 can be entered by the combination of “B” input and the control button repeatedly pressed, and the alphabet of another group, group 4, can be input by pressing the long press repeatedly. Fig. 1-1 Arbitrary rules (e.g., "2 to 222") are defined as well as the three letters displayed on the keypad buttons, and a random group of letters is selected by repeating and long pressing of the control button. It is also possible to enter.

The control method by repeated pressing after long press is the basic input of the native language as shown in Korean (Figs. 4-5 to 4-8) and Japanese (Figs. 2-1 and 2-2). In the case of, it would be very useful for inputting intermittent numbers among sentences and input of English alphabets (in languages other than English). In the following, application examples are briefly mentioned for each language, and may be applied to other languages not mentioned.

26.2 English

In the examples of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8, the modified alphabet (eg lattice / light consonants and dropped consonants) is inputted by repeatedly pressing the button to which the basic consonants belong (eg “a = 1”, “ㄲ =”). 11 ”,“ ㅋ = 111 ”or“ ㄱ = 1 ”,“ ㅋ = 11 ”,“ ㄲ = 111 ”) may be similarly applied. In other words, when alphabets belonging to the same button are consecutively inputted, the alphabetical letters appearing after the second time are inputted by long pressing. For example, if the continuous press of the [1] button is defined as “ㅋ” in FIG. 4-5, when “a” is continuously displayed, it may be recognized as “ㅋ” instead of “a + a”. If you input long press on “a”, it can be recognized as “a + a”. In other words, long press is used to input “a” of the second syllable in “country”. Even when entering “Kukka”, enter “ㅋ = 1 ~ 1” using long press on “ㅋ” input of the second syllable. This can be applied optionally by inputting the variant alpha by a control method (either one or both at the same time).

An example of inputting some alphabets that are not representative alphabets in a long press can be entered by pressing and holding one of the lattice sounds or the hard consonants. For example, when the lattice sound is defined as long pressing, the hard consonant (double consonant) can be input by a combination of basic consonants. Of course, as mentioned in the earlier filings, there is an ambiguity that, in the case of “Ottogi”, “ot” (where “c” is the final support of “oh”).

Similarly, a long press can be applied to an input of a consonant assigned with a vowel (eg, “ㅎ” assigned to the [0] button in FIGS. 4-5 and 4-6). That is to say, "ㅎ = 0 ~". Based on the applicant's opinion, as previously stated in the application, “ㅎ = 8 **” or “ㅎ = 0 **” or “ㅎ = 0 (only in special cases previously presented by the application)” based on Fig. 4-5. It is assumed that inputting is better in terms of input efficiency than using long press. The input method of the dropped consonant (eg “ㅎ”) and the input method by long pressing can be selectively applied.

Next, we present an example of the application of “control method by repeated press after long press”. Applicant's representative Korean input system is introduced on the homepage http://www.simplecode.net with simulators (introduction to gore, symbol input and parallel input technology), and input of numbers and English alphabets is also possible without mode switching. It is mentioned.

The person in the industry says that there is a need to provide the input technology of numbers and English without changing the mode, so that this application is inevitably executed. (For reference, the company that made this request did not adopt the applicant's Korean input technology. It is a shame.)

A common frequency of use for input is “native alphabet? Symbols (Special Characters)? number ? English alphabet ”. As shown in Fig. 4-5, there is no control button that can be used to input numbers and English. It is possible to enter numbers in combination with the long press of the number button and the [*] button (ie “* ~ = number control”). That is, "number 1 = 1 * ~". The [*] button is primarily used as a vowel button and a control button at the same time. Pressing the [*] button once indicates the vowel “ㅣ”, but pressing and holding the [*] button once is an arbitrary object (in this example, “number”). Control ”).

The input of the English alphabet can be performed in various ways. For example, it can be defined as “A = 2 # ~”, “B = 2 # ~ #”, “C = 2 # ~ #”. What is not recognized as “A” and vowel “ㅣ” for input “2 # ~ #”, and what can be recognized as “B” is the absence of syllables beginning with the vowel “ㅣ” in Korean (a kind of Korean restriction). Is to use. If the long press and repeat presses of the [#] button are used for other purposes, the English alphabet is regarded as a subsequent alphabet of numbers, and “A = 2 * ~ *” or “A = 2 * ~ # (cross control method). ”Can be defined as“ B = 2 * ~ ** ”or“ B = 2 * ~ ## ”.

One more example of control by long press is given. 4-5 to 4-8, inputting "TT" and "ㅠ" by repeatedly pressing the button to which the vowel "-" is assigned (that is, "ㅡ = *", "TT = **" , “ㅠ = ***”), it takes up to 3 consecutive hits of the [*] button for alphabet input. In this case, the sound control can be selected by pressing “Maximum Possible Repetitions + 1” times (ie, [*] button 4 times). "That is," ㅋ = 1 **** ". In this case, in order to alleviate the burden of pressing four times in a row, “beep control = * ~” can be defined as “ㅋ = a + {beep control} = 1 * ~”. This applies equally to falling consonants that are considered to be light consonants and modified alphabets. In addition, the control processing method can be applied to all cases where the sound control is selected by the repetitive selection method, and the modified alphabet input by long press and the modified alphabet input by conventional repeated press are optional (one or both of them). Of course it is possible. In this case, use the other button (eg [#] button) to enter numbers.

26.3 Japanese

As in the case of Japanese of Figures 2-1 and 2-2, there are a number of subsequent alphabets, which may be useful when inputting subsequent alphabets by a repetitive selection method. In other words, it is defined as “あ = 1” or “あ = 1 ~”, “い = 1 ~ 1”, “う = 1 ~ 11”, “え = 1 ~ 111”, “お = 1 ~ 1111”. . As mentioned above, if the alphabet assigned to the same button appears consecutively, only the second letter of the alphabet assigned to the same button is entered using long press (ie, “1 ~”), otherwise, simply It is entered without ambiguity even if it is entered by pressing once. However, it has already been shown in the Japanese examples of FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2 that the subsequent control processing method can be used to input without ambiguity with a small number of input strokes. have.

Representative alphabets A case of inputting a subsequent alphabet as a control processing method without applying the repetitive selection method by long press shows a case of inputting a modified alphabet using long press. When inputting the subsequent alphabet by the control processing method in Fig. 2-2, when inputting the modified alphabet (eg, “ば”, “ぱ”) of the representative alphabet (eg “は”) as shown in Fig. 2-3, the input stroke You can see that there are a lot more unnatural. In this case, the long press of the corresponding button ([6] button in FIG. 2-2) may be defined as a modified alphabet of the representative alphabet (eg, “ば”). The rest of the modified alphabet “정의 = ば + predetermined control button (eg [*] button) = 6 ~ *” can be defined.

Here, if the modified alphabet is not input by using the long press of the button to which the alphabet is assigned, the repeated selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet input by the control processing method may be applied together. The input of the modified alphabet (eg “ば”, “ぱ”) can be entered by pressing and holding the arbitrary control button (eg [*] button) and the combination of the representative alphabet “は”. That is, it can be defined as "ば (any modified alphabet) = は + * ~ = 6 * ~" and "ぱ (any other modified alphabet) = は + * ~ * = 6 * ~ *". If there are many variations of “Ha”, it can be entered without ambiguity by pressing long press like “6 * ~ **”, “6 * ~ ***”, ... Of course. Just as "*" and "* ~" can represent different objects, "**" and "* ~ *" can represent different objects (in this case, arbitrary controls).

It is important to note that not only is it possible to select arbitrary controls by long presses, but also by repeatedly pressing the buttons (eg control buttons) used for long presses after one long press, without any ambiguity, eg Control).

Similarly, in the input of numbers and English alphabets, the description described in Korean can be applied. For example, you can define “number 2 = 2 # ~”, “A = 2 # ~ #”, “B = 2 # ~ ##”,. . . It can be defined as

26.4 Chinese

It has been shown that the Chinese Pinyin can be input without any ambiguity (or almost no ambiguity) on the keypad of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-6. However, if you input "bb = 11" to shorten the word consisting of "b__b__" (underlined part of the Pinyin syllable consisting of vowels), if the language restriction that "bb" does not occur consecutively in Chinese Pinyin applies, = p ”. In this case, as mentioned above, after inputting “b = 1”, the input value “1” is intentionally set to “b” by a predetermined time delay or a specific operation (eg, pressing the [>] button). = 1 ”. Also, it can be regarded as a problem of ambiguity caused by successive input of the alphabet assigned to the same button. In this case, too, by applying the control method by pressing and holding the representative alphabet ([1] button, the representative alphabet “b” to “b = 1 ~”) can be solved. For example, if you have "bb = 1 ~ 1 ~" or alphabets assigned to the same button in a row, you can set "bb = 11 ~" by long pressing on the second and subsequent alphabet inputs.

Next, you will see the numbers and symbols entered. This will be described with reference to Figs. 10-6. The input of English in Chinese is not mentioned because it is not necessary to convert it into Chinese after entering the English alphabet. 10-6 may be defined as "number 1 = 1 * ~". In FIG. 10-6, one press of the [*] button is recognized as “a”, but a long press (“* ~”) can express a separate object (“numeric control” in the example). 10-6, it is preferable to apply a control processing method using long presses and repeat presses of the [#] button to various symbol inputs. For example, associate dot (.), Comma (,), colon (:), semi-colon (;), and so on with the [2] button. “Dot (.) = 2 # ~”, “comma (,) = 2 # ~ # ”,“ colon (:) = 2 # ~ ## ”, and“ semi-colon (;) = 2 # ~ ### ”. The reason why “2 # ~ #” is not recognized as “dot (.) + I” but can be recognized as “comma (,)” is because the Chinese pinyin uses Chinese restrictions that do not begin with “i”. Similarly, “2 # ~ ##” can be recognized as “colon (:)” instead of “dot (.) + I + i” or “comma (,) + i”. If you want to input “dot (.) + I”, as mentioned above, input “2 # ~” and confirm the “dot (.)” After a certain time or a certain operation (eg [>] Button to confirm) and enter “# = i”.

The reason why the [*] button is not used to input the symbol (s) of a specific group in Fig. 10-6 is rare, since there is a pinyin beginning with “a”, “e”, “o”, etc. It is because ambiguity may occur when using "Repeated Press". Since there is only one number, the long press of the [*] button only requires one combination. In the case of Figs. 10-1 to 10-5, since there is no pinyin beginning with “i” and “u” assigned to the [*] button and the [#] button, a long length is obtained using the [*] button and the [#] button. It is always possible to input numbers, symbols, etc. as a control method using repeated press after pressing.

Obviously, the above description can be similarly applied to other keypads as well as the keypads of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-6.

26.5 languages using roman

In the European language of the Roman alphabet, there are many variations of the alphabet with subscripts in the basic alphabet. It can be applied to input of modified alphabet and input of special character by applying various long press described above.

It has realized the most concise layout of keyboards, ambiguity, and "minimum" input strokes among Korean keypad Korean input systems.

In addition, a combination of long press of a specific button and repeated pressing of a specific button, and combination of long pressing of a specific button and repeated pressing of a control button have been proposed.

Claims (35)

In a keypad equipped with a plurality of buttons, including an alphabet button which is a button having one or more alphabets arranged or mapped, and a control button which is a button not arranged with alphabets, (p1) if any one of the alphabet buttons is pressed once, a predetermined one of the alphabets arranged or mapped to the alphabet buttons is recognized; (p2) when the control button is pressed once, recognizing one alphabet not recognized in (p1) among alphabets arranged or mapped to the alphabet button pressed in (p1); In the alphabet input method comprising a consonant, a vowel, a word or a phrase, An index in which a phrase (word or phrase) and a simple code, which is a button value on a keypad corresponding to the phrase, is stored is provided. (a) accepting a button input value from the keypad; (b) determining whether the input value is pressed twice in succession of the alphabet button; (c) comparing the input value with a simple code stored in the index if the input value is pressed twice in sequence of the alphabet button; (d) recognizing a phrase matching the comparison result of step (c); Alphabet input method using the keypad, characterized in that consisting of Entering an alphabet containing consonants, vowels, words, or phrases on a keypad with multiple buttons, including an alphabet button that is one or more alphabets arranged or mapped, and a control button that is not arranged alphabetically In the method, An index in which a phrase (word or phrase) and a simple code, which is a button value on a keypad corresponding to the phrase, is stored is provided. (a) if any one of the alphabet buttons is pressed once, a predetermined alphabet letter among the alphabets arranged or mapped to the alphabet buttons is recognized; (b-1) when the control button is pressed once, recognizing one alphabet not recognized in (a) of the alphabets arranged or mapped to the alphabet button pressed in the (a); (b-2) If the control button in (b-1) is not pressed and any alphabet button is pressed again, the input is the button value pressed in the step (a) and the step (b-2). Comparing a value with a simple code stored in the index; (c) recognizing a phrase matching the comparison result of step (b-2); Character input method using the keypad, characterized in that consisting of delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete delete

Images